Dell Cloud H815dw, Smart S2815dn Multifunction Printer User's Guide
Below you will find brief information for Multifunction Printer Cloud H815dw, Multifunction Printer Smart S2815dn. This document provides instructions on setting up and using your new Dell multifunction printer. The guide includes sections on connecting your printer to a computer or network, installing printer drivers, loading paper, printing, copying, scanning, faxing, and using Dell Document Hub. With its wide array of features, your new printer will simplify your printing and document management tasks.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw
Dell™ Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn
User's Guide
Regulatory Model: Dell H815dw / Dell S2815dn
Contents
Before Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
About License
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
As for RSA BSAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
ICC Profile Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
JPEG Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Math Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 libtiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Zlib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1 Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw
Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn
User's Guide
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
Conventions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
2 Finding Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
3 Product Features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
4 About the Printer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Front and Rear Views
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Space Requirements
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
Operator Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
Additional Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Non-bundled Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007 Contents 3
Securing the Printer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
Ordering Supplies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
Setting Up the Printer (Printer Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5 Overview of the Printer Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
6 Installing Optional Accessory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
Installing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
Updating Your Driver to Detect 550-Sheet Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
Turning on the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
Connecting to a Computer or a Network
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
Connecting to a Computer Using the USB Cable (Direct Connection) . . . . . 61
Connecting to a Network Using the Ethernet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Connecting to a Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Connecting to the Telephone Line
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
Setting Up the Printer Using Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows
®
Only)
. . . . . .
64
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Setting Up the Printer in Another Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Configuring the Wireless Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
Determining the Wireless Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Configuring the Wireless Settings Using Dell Printer Easy Install . . . . . . . 68
Configuring the Wireless Settings Without Using Dell Printer Easy Install . . . 70
Reconfiguring the Wireless Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
8 Setting the IP Address
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
Assigning an IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
When Using the Dell Printer Easy Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
When Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
When Using the Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Verifying the IP Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
4 Contents Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Verifying the Settings Using Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Verifying the Settings Using Ping Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
9 Loading Paper
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
10 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows
®
Computers
. . . . .
83
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
Changing the firewall settings before installing your printer . . . . . . . . . . 83
Starting Dell Printer Easy Install
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
USB Cable Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Network Connection Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
Setting Up for Shared Printing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
Enabling Shared Printing from the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Checking the Shared Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
11 Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers
. . . . .
95
Installing the Drivers and Software
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, OS X 10.7, OS X 10.8,
OS X 10.9, or OS X 10.10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Configuring Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
12 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)
. . .
99
Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
Setup Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Installing the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Setting Up the Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Setting the Default Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Specifying the Printing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Uninstalling the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Setup Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Installing the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Setting Up the Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Setting the Default Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Specifying the Printing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator . . . . . . . 104
Contents 5
Uninstalling the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Operation on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
Setup Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Installing the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting Up the Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Setting the Default Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Specifying the Printing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Uninstalling the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Using Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
13 Operator Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
About the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Basic Operations on the Touch Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
To Select the Item on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
To Scroll the Screen or the Listed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
About the Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Notification Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Lock Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Envelope Mode Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Wireless LAN Connection Status Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Time/Network Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Account Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
To Move the Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
To Add the Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
To Delete the Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
To Change the Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using the Number Pad
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
Number Pad Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Changing Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Inserting a Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Printing a Panel Settings Report
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
6 Contents Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Changing the Language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
When Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
When Using the Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Setting the Power Saver Timer Option
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
About the Concurrent Jobs Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
14 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
Setting Up From Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Setting Up From Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
Overview of the Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Printer Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Print Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Copy Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Print Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Printer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Tray Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
E-Mail Server Settings Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Set Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Order Supplies at: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Contact Dell Support at: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Dell Document Hub at: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Page Display Format
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
Top Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Left Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Right Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
Details of the Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Printer Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Print Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Copy Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Contents 7
Print Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Tray Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
15 Understanding the Printer Menus
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
Report / List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
PCL Fonts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
PCL Macros List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
PS Fonts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
PDF Fonts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Error History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Print Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Demo Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Protocol Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Server Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fax Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fax Pending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Stored Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Wi-Fi | WPS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Wi-Fi Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
WPS (Connect via PBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
WPS (Connect via PIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Paired Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Admin Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Secure Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
USB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
8 Contents Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Default Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219
Copy Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fax Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Scan Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Direct Print Defaults (available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer |
H815dw only) USB Direct Print Defaults (available on the Dell Smart
Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Tray Management
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Tray Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Language Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
226
Panel Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
Private Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Public Mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Proof Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Secure Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Secure Fax Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Tile Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Copy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Darken / Lighten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Select Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
2 Sided Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Reduce/Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Original Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
2-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Auto Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
ID Copy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Scan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
235
Scan to Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Scan to Network Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Scan to USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Scan to WSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Contents 9
Scan to PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Tile Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Fax
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
240
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Print PDF/TIFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Print JPEG
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
242
Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Dell Document Hub
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245
Search for Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Browse for Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Smart OCR Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
E-mail Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Business Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Add Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Panel Lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250
Enabling the Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Disabling the Panel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Resetting Defaults
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
When Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
16 Print Media Guidelines
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
Paper
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
Recommended Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Unacceptable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Selecting Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Selecting Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Envelopes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
255
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Storing Print Media
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
Identifying Print Media and Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
257
Supported Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
10 Contents Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Supported Paper Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Paper Type Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
17 Loading Print Media
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
259
Capacity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
259
Print Media Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
. . . . . . . .
259
Loading Letterhead (Pre-Printed and Pre-Punched Paper) . . . . . . . . . 259
Loading Print Media in the MPF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
Loading Small Print Media in the MPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Printing on Envelopes – Envelope Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
To Set the Printer to the Envelope Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
To Cancel the Envelope Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Loading Envelopes in the MPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Envelope #10, DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Monarch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
C5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Loading Letterhead in the MPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Using the MPF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
269
Linking Trays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
270
Printing, Copying, Scanning, Faxing, and
Dell Document Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
18 Printing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273
Tips for Successful Printing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273
Tips on Storing Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Avoiding Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Sending a Job to Print
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273
Canceling a Print Job
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
274
Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows ® Operating System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Duplex Printing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
Duplex Printing With Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007 Contents 11
12 Contents
Using Booklet Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Using the Stored Print Feature
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Procedures for Printing Stored Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Supported File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Inserting and Removing a USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Printing a PDF/TIFF File in a USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Printing a JPEG File in a USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Printing With Web Services on Devices (WSD)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
Adding Roles of Printer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Printing With Wi-Fi Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Printing via Wi-Fi Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Resetting the Passphrase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Resetting the PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Mobile Printing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
286
Android OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Apple iOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Printing With AirPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Printing via AirPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Printing With Google Cloud Print
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
287
Preparing to Use the Printer with Google Cloud Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Enabling Google Cloud Print on the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Selecting the Version of the Google Cloud Print Service . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Registering the Printer to the Google Cloud Print Service . . . . . . . . . . 289
Sharing the Printer Using the Google Cloud Print Service . . . . . . . . . . 290
Canceling Registration to Google Cloud Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Printing via Google Cloud Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Tap to Print
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
291
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Adding the Printer to the Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Starting Printing or Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Printing a Report Page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
Printer Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Using the Operator Panel to Change the Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . 293
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change the Printer
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
19 Copying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
Loading Paper for Copying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
Selecting Paper Tray
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
Preparing a Document
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
Making Copies From the Document Glass
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
296
Making Copies From the DADF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
297
Setting Copy Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
298
Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Darken / Lighten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Select Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2 Sided Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Reduce / Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Original Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Auto Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Using the ID Copy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
304
Changing the Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
20 Scanning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
Scanning Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
Tips for Easy Network Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Scanning - With scanner driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Scanning - Without scanner driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to WSD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
310
Printer Setup for Scan to Web Services on Devices (WSD) . . . . . . . . . 310
Scanning and Sending Images to the Computer Using Web Services on
Devices (WSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on Devices (WSD) . . . . . . . 311
Contents 13
Preparations for scanning from the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Scanning from the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
313
Scan Settings Tool
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
314
IP Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Password Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver . . . . . . . . . . 317
Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Adding a Scanning Destination to the Printer's Address Book . . . . . . . . 323
Sending the Scanned File on the Network Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Scanning to a USB Memory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
329
Types of a USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
330
Preparing the Printer to Send the E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Setting the DNS Server Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server . . . . . . . . 331
Setting the Administrator's E-mail Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Adding a New E-Mail Address to the Printer's Address Book . . . . . . . . 333
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
21 Faxing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
335
Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Dell Printer Easy Install
. . . . . .
335
Setting Your Country
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
Setting the Printer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Setting the Time and Date
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
Changing the Clock Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
338
Setting Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Speaker Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Ringer Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Specifying the Fax Settings Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
339
14 Contents Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Changing the Fax Settings Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Available Fax Settings Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Advanced Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Sending a Fax
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
345
Loading an Original Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Adjusting the Document Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Adjusting the Document Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Sending a Fax From Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Sending a Fax Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Confirming Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Automatic Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Sending a Delayed Fax
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
349
Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Receiving a Fax
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
354
About Receiving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone (Remote Receive)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Receiving Faxes in the Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Polling Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Automatic Dialing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
356
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Setting Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Group Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Setting Group Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Editing Group Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Sending a Fax Using Group Dial (Multi-address Transmission) . . . . . . . 359
Printing a Speed Dial List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Phone Book
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
359
Other Ways to Fax
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
360
Using the Secure Receiving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Using an Answering Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Using a Computer Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Contents 15
Printing a Report
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
362
Changing Setting Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
362
22 Dell™ Document Hub
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
363
Registering the User and Signing In to the Dell Document Hub
. . . . . . . . . .
363
Registering a New User to the Dell Document Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Signing In to the Dell Document Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
When the Favorite List Screen is Displayed When You Tap the Tile on the
Dell Document Hub Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Returning to the Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Logging Out From the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Searching for and Printing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Browsing and Printing Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
366
Searching for the Files in the Selected Cloud Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Scanning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
Searching for the Location Across the Cloud Services . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Searching for the Location in the Selected Cloud Service . . . . . . . . . . 368
Scanning the Document Using Optical Character Recognition (OCR)
. . . . . . .
369
Receiving the Scanned File as an E-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Receiving the Scanned Image of the Business Card as an E-Mail
. . . . . . . .
371
Know Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
23 Understanding Your Printer Software
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
375
Printer Utility Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Updater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Address Book Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
ScanButton Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Address Books
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
377
Types of Address Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
App Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
381
16 Contents Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Preparing to use the App Manager - Dell H815dw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Using the App Manager - Dell H815dw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
Status Monitor Widget Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Installing the Status Monitor Widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Printer Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Order Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Status Monitor Console for Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Status Monitor Console Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Before Installing the Status Monitor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Installing the Status Monitor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Starting the Status Monitor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Printer Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Printer Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Dell Supplies Management System Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Service Tag Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Settings Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
24 User Authentication
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
393
Creating and Editing the User Accounts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
393
Creating a New User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Editing the User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Deleting the User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Logging In to the User Account on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer |
H815dw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Logging In Using the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Logging In Using the NFC Authentication Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Logging In to the User Account on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer |
S2815dn
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
395
Specifying the User Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Preparations for Remote Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Logging In for Remote Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Logging In for Local Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Contents 17
25 Tile Customization
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
397
Adding a New Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Selecting From the Pre-defined Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Creating a New Tile Including the Job Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
26 Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
399
Preparing the Printer to Access the External LDAP Server
. . . . . . . . . . . .
399
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Setting Authentication Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Setting LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Setting LDAP User Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File Using the E-mail Server Address
Book
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
402
Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
27 Using Digital Certificates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
403
Managing Certificates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
403
Preparing to Manage Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) . . . . . . . 404
Importing a Digital Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Setting a Digital Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Deleting a Digital Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Exporting a Digital Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Setting the Features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
407
Setting the SSL-use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Setting SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2,
EAP-TTLS PAP, EAP-TTLS CHAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
28 Understanding Printer Messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
413
Status Codes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
413
Error Messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
420
18 Contents Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
29 Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
423
Operating System Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Power Supply
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
423
Dimensions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
423
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
424
MIB Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Environment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
424
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Print Quality Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Cables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
425
Print Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
425
Copy Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
426
Scanner Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
426
Facsimile Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
427
Wireless Connection Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
427
Maintaining Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
30 Maintaining Your Printer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
431
Determining the Status of Supplies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
431
Conserving Supplies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
431
Ordering Supplies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
431
Storing Print Media
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
Storing Consumables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
433
Removing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Installing a Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Replacing the Drum Cartridge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
436
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007 Contents 19
Removing the Drum Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Installing a Drum Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Replacing the Fusing Unit, the Transfer Unit, and the Retard Roller
. . . . . . .
440
Removing the Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Installing a Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Removing the Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Installing a Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Removing the Retard Roller in Tray1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Installing a Retard Roller in Tray1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Cleaning the Scanner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
446
Cleaning the DADF Feed Roller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
447
Cleaning Inside the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Moving the Printer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
450
Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
452
31 Clearing Jams
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
457
Avoiding Jams
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
457
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
458
Clearing Paper Jams From the DADF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
459
Clearing Paper Jams From the MPF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
461
Clearing Paper Jams From Tray1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
465
Clearing Paper Jams From the Fusing Unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
468
If status code: 050-130 appears: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
If status code: 050-131 appears: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Clearing Paper Jams From the Regi Roll
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
472
If status code: 050-142 appears: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
If status code: 050-132 appears: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
. . . . . . . . . . . .
479
Clearing Paper Jams From the Trays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
482
When status code 050-134 appears: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
When status code 050-133 appears: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
20 Contents Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
32 Troubleshooting Guide
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
489
Basic Printer Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
489
Display Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
489
Printing Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
489
Print Quality Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
490
The output is too light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Toner smears or print comes off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Random spots/Blurred images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
The entire output is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Streaks appear on the output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Pitched dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Vertical blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Mottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Ghosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Light-induced fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Jagged characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Banding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Auger mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Wrinkled/Stained paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Damage on the leading edge of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Jam/Alignment Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
506
The top and side margins are incorrect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Images are skewed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
MPF Misfeed Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Exit Jam (Exit Sensor Off JAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
MPF Multi-feed Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Noise
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
510
Copy Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
511
Fax Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
511
Scanning Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
512
Digital Certificate Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
515
Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007 Contents 21
Problems With Installed Optional Accessory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
516
Wi-Fi Direct Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
516
Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
516
Other Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
517
Contacting Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
517
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Dell™ Technical Support Policy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
521
Online Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Warranty and Return Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Recycling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Contacting Dell
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
522
22 Contents Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007
Before Beginning
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings..................................................... 25
1 Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw
Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn User's Guide .... 29
2 Finding Information..................................................................... 31
3 Product Features......................................................................... 33
4 About the Printer......................................................................... 35
23
24
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your printer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2015 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft , Windows , Windows Server , Windows Vista, and
Active Directory are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Apple,
Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Macintosh, Mac OS, OS X, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.; Android, Google Chrome, Gmail, Google, Google Cloud Print, Google
Drive, and Google Play are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.; Adobe, PostScript and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries; trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance;
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are registered
Wi-Fi Protected Setup , WPA , and WPA2 are trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance; Red Hat and Red Hat
Enterprise Linux are registered trademarks of Red Hat. Inc. in the U.S. and other countries; SUSE is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc., in the
United States and other countries;
Ltd.; the
QR Code
Box
MIFARE is a trademark of NXP Semiconductors; Thinxtream is a trademark of Thinxtream Technologies Pte.
is a registered trademark of Denso Wave Incorporated; Dropbox is a trademark or registered trademark of Dropbox Inc.;
logo are including without limitation, either trademarks, service marks or registered trademarks of Box, Inc. registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
RSA and BSAFE
Box and
are either
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products.
Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
About License
XML Paper Specification (XPS) : This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369; includes software developed by Eric Young ([email protected]); AES reserved. This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms;
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 Marti Maria.
DES : This product
: Copyright (c) 2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights
ICC Profile (Little cms) :
As for RSA BSAFE
This printer includes RSA
®
BSAFE
®
Cryptographic software from EMC Corporation.
ICC Profile Header
Copyright (c) 1994-1996 SunSoft, Inc.
Rights Reserved
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN
NO EVENT SHALL SUNSOFT, INC. OR ITS PARENT COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings 25
Except as contained in this notice, the name of SunSoft, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without written authorization from SunSoft Inc.
JPEG Library
Independent JPEG Group's free JPEG software
-------------------------------------------
This package contains C software to implement JPEG image encoding, decoding, and transcoding. JPEG is a standardized compression method for full-color and gray-scale images.
The distributed programs provide conversion between JPEG "JFIF" format and image files in PBMPLUS PPM/PGM, GIF, BMP, and Targa file formats. The core compression and decompression library can easily be reused in other programs, such as image viewers. The package is highly portable C code; we have tested it on many machines ranging from PCs to Crays.
We are releasing this software for both noncommercial and commercial use. Companies are welcome to use it as the basis for JPEG-related products. We do not ask a royalty, although we do ask for an acknowledgement in product literature (see the README file in the distribution for details). We hope to make this software industrial-quality --- although, as with anything that's free, we offer no warranty and accept no liability.
For more information, contact [email protected].
Contents of this directory
------------------------------------------jpegsrc.vN.tar.gz contains source code, documentation, and test files for release N in Unix format.
jpegsrN.zip contains source code, documentation, and test files for release N in Windows format.
jpegaltui.vN.tar.gz contains source code for an alternate user interface for cjpeg/djpeg in Unix format.
jpegaltuiN.zip contains source code for an alternate user interface for cjpeg/djpeg in Windows format.
wallace.ps.gz is a PostScript file of Greg Wallace's introductory article about JPEG. This is an update of the article that appeared in the April 1991
Communications of the ACM.
jpeg.documents.gz tells where to obtain the JPEG standard and documents about JPEG-related file formats.
jfif.ps.gz is a PostScript file of the JFIF (JPEG File Interchange Format) format specification.
jfif.txt.gz is a plain text transcription of the JFIF specification; it's missing a figure, so use the PostScript version if you can.
TIFFTechNote2.txt.gz is a draft of the proposed revisions to TIFF 6.0's JPEG support.
pm.errata.gz is the errata list for the first printing of the textbook "JPEG Still Image Data Compression Standard" by Pennebaker and Mitchell.
jdosaobj.zip contains pre-assembled object files for JMEMDOSA.ASM. If you want to compile the IJG code for MS-DOS, but don't have an assembler, these files may be helpful.
Math Library
Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice is preserved.
==================================================== copysignf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
math_private.h: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
powf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
scalbnf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
libtiff
Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
26 Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Zlib
zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library version 1.2.8, April 28th, 2013
Copyright (C) 1995-2013 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly [email protected]
Mark Adler [email protected]
____________________
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.
October 2015 Rev. A00
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings 27
28 Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
1
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw
Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn
User's Guide
Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and operation of your Dell Cloud Multifunction
Printer | H815dw and Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn. For information on other documentation included with your printer, see "Finding Information."
NOTE: In this manual, Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw and Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn are referred to as the "printer."
NOTE: In this manual, the procedures for the computer are explained using Microsoft ® Windows ® 7 unless stated otherwise.
Conventions
The following describe the meaning of the symbols and fonts used in this manual:
Bold texts : • Names of hardware button on the operator panel.
• Screen names on the touch panel.
• Menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen.
Texts in Courier New font : • Menus and messages displayed on the touch panel.
<
>
• Characters entered from the computer.
• Directory paths.
: • Key on the keyboard of the computer.
: • Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.
" " : • Cross references in this manual.
• Characters entered from the operator panel.
• Messages displayed on the computer screen.
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn User's Guide 29
30 Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn User's Guide
2
Finding Information
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.
What are you looking for?
• Drivers for my printer
• My User's Guide
Find it here
Software and Documentation disc
The Software and Documentation disc contains setup video, documentation, and drivers for your printer. You can use the Software and Documentation install drivers or access your setup video and documentation.
disc to
Readme files may be included on your Software and Documentation technical reference material for experienced users or technicians.
disc to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your printer or advanced
Setup Guide • How to set up my printer
• How to use my printer
• Safety information
• Warranty information
Important Information
WARNING: Read and follow all safety instructions in the Important
Information prior to setting up and operating your printer.
• Express Service Code and Service Tag
• Latest drivers for my printer
• Documentation for my printer
Service Tag
ABCD123
Express Service Code
01234567890
The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located inside the front cover of your printer.
Go to dell.com/support .
Finding Information 31
What are you looking for?
• Answers to technical service and support questions
Find it here dell.com/support provides several online tools, including:
• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and online courses
• Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as the printer drivers
• Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair information
• Downloads — Drivers
• Manuals— Printer documentation and product specifications
Go to dell.com/support . Select your region, and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information.
32 Finding Information
Product Features
This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links.
Converting and storing with Dell™ Document Hub
(Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw Only)
Printing with Dell Document Hub
(Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw Only)
3
With the Dell Document Hub, you can scan hard copy documents and store them directly in your preferred cloud storage service. You can also convert hard copy documents into editable digital content before sending them to the cloud storage.
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print) (USB Direct
Print)
With the Dell Document Hub, you can easily locate and print documents stored in cloud storage. You can also search for files across multiple cloud storage services simultaneously.
Printing With Web Services on Devices (WSD)
The USB Direct Print feature enables you to print files directly from a USB memory without requiring you to start your computer and an application.
Using the ID Copy (ID Copy)
When the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can print documents from the computer using the Web Services on
Devices (WSD) Print function.
Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image (Scan to Email)
You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its original size by tapping ID
Copy on the touch panel.
When you want to send scanned data by e-mail, use the
Scan to Email feature. You can directly send the data scanned as an e-mail attachment. You can choose destination e-mail addresses from the address book on the printer or server. Or, you can enter the address from the touch panel on the printer's operator panel.
Product Features 33
Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to WSD Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP
(Scan to Network Folder)
When the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can scan and send the images to a computer using the Scan to Web
Services on Devices (WSD) function.
Scanning to a USB Memory (Scan to USB)
You can transfer data scanned to a PC or a server via SMB or FTP without service software. Although prior registration of the destination FTP server or PC on the address book is required, it helps save your time.
Making Copies From the Document Glass (Scan From
Document Glass)
With the Scan to USB feature, you don't need a PC to connect a USB memory. You can specify the USB memory inserted into the printer's port as a data saving location when you scan data.
Making Copies From the DADF (Scan From DADF)
You can scan the pages of a book or a brochure from the document glass. When you scan documents using the document glass, place them facing down.
Remote Authentication Using the LDAP or Kerberos Server
(Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn Only)
You can scan pieces of unbound paper using the duplex automatic document feeder (DADF). When you scan documents using the DADF, load them facing up.
The user authentication using the LDAP or Kerberos server is available to control the user’s login to the printer. Only users who can access the specified server are allowed to log in to the printer.
34 Product Features
About the Printer
This chapter provides an overview of your printer.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.
4
Front and Rear Views
Front View
8 9 10 1
7 6 5 4 3 2
1 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
2 Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
3 Tray1
4 Optional 550-Sheet Feeder (Tray2)
5 Toner Cartridge
6 Drum Cartridge
7 Front Cover
8 Front USB Port
9 Operator Panel
10 Output Tray Extension
NOTE: Extend the output tray extension to prevent the printed paper from falling off the printer.
NOTE: The operator panel can be flipped up until it clicks to make it easier to take out the printed paper or the drum cartridge.
About the Printer 35
Rear View
11
10
9
1 Power Switch
2 Ethernet Port
3 USB Port
4 Phone Connector
5 Wall Jack Connector
6 "Blue" Plug
12
8
6
7
7 Power Connector
8 Chute
9 Duplex Unit
10 Transfer Unit
11 Fusing Unit
12 Rear Cover
1
2
3
4
5
36 About the Printer
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
6
1
2
5
1 DADF Cover
2 Document Guides
3 Document Glass
4 Document Stopper
5 Document Feeder Tray
6 DADF Feed Roller
NOTE: Pull out the document stopper to prevent the document from falling off the printer.
4
3
About the Printer 37
Space Requirements
Provide enough room to open the printer trays, covers, and optional accessories, and for proper ventilation.
100 mm/
3.94 inches
732 mm/
28.82 inches
400 mm/15.75 inches
439 mm/17.28 inches
100 mm/3.94 inches
Operator Panel
400 mm/15.75 inches
438 mm/17.24 inches
600 mm/23.62 inches
For more information on the operator panel, see "About the Operator Panel."
38 About the Printer
Additional Components
Optional Accessories
The following optional accessory is available for the printer.
• Optional 550-sheet feeder
Non-bundled Items
The following items are required for connecting the printer to a computer or a network. Please purchase them as needed.
• USB cable
• Ethernet cable
Securing the Printer
To protect your printer from theft, you can use the optional Kensington lock.
Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer.
Security Slot
For details, see the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.
Security Slot
About the Printer 39
Ordering Supplies
You can order consumables from Dell online when using a networked printer. Enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser, launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool , and click the web address under Order Supplies at: to order toner or supplies for your printer.
You can also order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell by using the Dell Supplies Management
System :
NOTE: For Macintosh, start the Status Monitor Widget, and then select Order Supplies button to open Order window.
1 Double-click the icon on your desktop.
If you cannot find the icon on your desktop: a Right-click DLRMM.EXE
under x:\abc\Dell Printers\Additional Color Laser
Software\Reorder , where x:\abc is the location where the printer software is installed.
b Choose Send To from the drop-down menu, and then click Desktop (create shortcut) on the submenu.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
You can also launch the Dell Supplies Management System by clicking Start All Programs Dell Printers
Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer - H815dw or Dell Smart Multifunction Printer - S2815dn Dell Supplies
Management System .
2 Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site link ( www.dell.com/supplies ), or order Dell printer supplies by phone.
To ensure that you get the best service, have your Dell printer’s Service Tag ready.
For the location of your Service Tag, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag."
40 About the Printer
Setting Up the Printer (Printer
Setup)
5 Overview of the Printer Setup................................................... 43
6 Installing Optional Accessory................................................... 45
7 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer ................................. 53
8 Setting the IP Address ............................................................... 75
9 Loading Paper.............................................................................. 79
10 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows
®
Computers............. 83
11 Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers.............. 95
12 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS) .............99
41
42
Overview of the Printer Setup
The following are the procedures necessary to set up the printer.
Hardware preparations
"Installing Optional Accessory"
"Turning on the Printer"
Initial settings
"Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel"
Connections
"Connecting to a Computer or a Network"
"Connecting to the Telephone Line"
Printer setup
"Setting Up the Printer Using Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows ®
Only)"
"Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers"
"Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers"
"Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)"
5
Overview of the Printer Setup 43
44 Overview of the Printer Setup
6
Installing Optional Accessory
This chapter describes how to install the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2).
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.
Installing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
WARNING: If you install the optional 550-sheet feeder after setting up the printer, be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and disconnect all cables from the rear of the printer before starting this task.
NOTE: The
Software and Documentation
disc also contains video instructions. In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy
Install, click Installation Video.
1 Ensure that the printer is turned off, and then disconnect all cables from the rear of the printer.
2 Remove the tape and the bag holding the screws.
NOTE: Save the screws as you will need them later.
3 Place the optional 550-sheet feeder in the same location that the printer is located.
4 Gently pull open the MPF cover.
5 Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull the MPF from the printer.
Installing Optional Accessory 45
6 Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.
7 Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.
46 Installing Optional Accessory
8 Lift the printer and align the five guide pins of the optional 550-sheet feeder with the holes at the bottom of the printer. Gently lower the printer onto the optional 550-sheet feeder.
WARNING: Two people are required to lift the printer.
WARNING: Be careful not to pinch your fingers when lowering the printer onto the optional 550-sheet feeder.
9 Secure the optional 550-sheet feeder to the printer by tightening the two screws provided with the feeder, using a coin or similar object.
Installing Optional Accessory 47
10 Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.
11 Insert the MPF into the printer, push until it stops, and close the MPF cover.
12 Re-connect all cables into the rear of the printer, and turn on the printer.
NOTE: The printer will automatically detect the attached tray but will not detect the paper type.
13 Print the system settings report to confirm that the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed correctly.
For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."
14 Confirm Tray2 (550 Sheet Feeder) is listed in the system settings report under Printer Options .
If the feeder is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and re-install the optional 550-sheet feeder.
15 After loading paper in the optional 550-sheet feeder, specify the paper type from the printer touch panel.
a b c
Press the (Information) button.
Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Tray Management .
Tap Tray Settings .
f d e
Tap Tray2 .
Tap Type .
Tap until the desired paper type appears, and then tap the desired paper type.
g Tap OK .
16 If you installed the optional 550-sheet feeder after installing the printer driver, update your driver by following the instructions for each operating system. If the printer is on a network, update the driver for each client.
48 Installing Optional Accessory
Updating Your Driver to Detect 550-Sheet Feeder
When Using PCL Driver
Microsoft
Windows
Windows
®
®
®
Windows
8 x64/
® 8/
Windows ®
8.1/
8.1 x64/
Windows Server
Windows Server
® 2012/
® 2012 R2
Windows
Windows
®
®
7/
7 x64/
Windows Server ® 2008 R2 x64
Windows Vista
Windows Vista
®
®
/
x64
Windows Server
Windows Server
® 2008/
® 2008 x64
Windows Server
Windows Server
® 2003/
® 2003 x64
1
2
3
4
5
6
On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel Hardware and Sound ( Hardware for Windows Server
Server ® 2012 R2) Devices and Printers .
® 2012/Windows
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Printer properties .
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup .
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK .
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click Start Devices and Printers .
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Printer properties .
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup .
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK .
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers .
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Properties .
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup .
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK .
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Printers dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click Start Control Panel Printers .
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Properties .
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup .
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK .
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Printers dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click start Printers and Faxes .
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Properties .
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup .
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK .
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer , follow these steps:
1 Click the Configuration tab, and then select Installable Options .
2 Select Paper Tray Configuration in the Items list box.
3 Select 2 Trays in the Paper Tray Configuration drop-down menu in Setting for .
4 Click OK .
Installing Optional Accessory 49
5 Close the Devices and Printers ( Printers , or Printers and Faxes ) dialog box.
When Using PS Driver
Windows
Windows
Windows
Windows
®
®
®
®
8/
8 x64/
8.1/
8.1 x64/
Windows Server
Windows Server
® 2012/
® 2012 R2
Windows
Windows
®
®
7/
7 x64/
Windows Server ® 2008 R2 x64
Windows Vista ®
Windows Vista ®
/
x64
Windows Server
Windows Server
® 2008/
® 2008 x64
Windows Server
Windows Server
® 2003/
® 2003 x64
1
2
3
4
5
6
On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel Hardware and Sound ( Hardware for Windows Server
Server ® 2012 R2) Devices and Printers .
® 2012/Windows
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Printer properties .
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup .
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK .
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click Start Devices and Printers .
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Printer properties .
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup .
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK .
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers .
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Properties .
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup .
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK .
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Printers dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click Start Control Panel Printers .
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Properties .
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup .
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK .
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Printers dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click Start Printers and Faxes .
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Properties .
Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup .
Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK .
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer , follow these steps:
1 Click the Configuration tab, and then select Installable Options .
2 Select Paper Tray Configuration in the Items list box.
3 Select 2 Trays in the Paper Tray Configuration drop-down menu in Setting for .
4 Click OK .
50 Installing Optional Accessory
5 Close the Devices and Printers ( Printers , or Printers and Faxes ) dialog box.
OS X 10.9.x/OS X 10.10.x
OS X 10.7.x/OS X 10.8.x
1
2
3
Select Printers & Scanners in System Preferences .
Select the printer in the Printers list, and click Options & Supplies .
Select Options , select the options that have been installed on the printers, and then click
OK .
1
2
3
Select Print & Scan in System Preferences .
Select the printer in the Printers list, and click Options & Supplies .
Select Driver , select the options that have been installed on the printers, and then click OK .
Mac OS X 10.5.x/Mac OS X 10.6.x
1 Select Print & Fax in System Preferences .
2 Select the printer in the Printers list, and click Options & Supplies .
3 Select Driver , select the options that have been installed on the printers, and then click OK .
When Using XML Paper Specification (XPS) Driver
NOTE: The XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver does not support Windows Server ® 2003 and Windows Server ® 2003 x64.
Windows
Windows
Windows
Windows
®
®
®
®
8/
8 x64/
8.1/
8.1 x64/
Windows Server
Windows Server
® 2012/
® 2012 R2
Windows
Windows
®
®
7/
7 x64/
Windows Server ® 2008 R2 x64
Windows Vista ®
Windows Vista ®
/
x64
Windows Server
Windows Server
® 2008/
® 2008 x64
1
2
3
4
5
On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel Hardware and Sound ( Hardware for Windows Server
Server ® 2012 R2) Devices and Printers .
® 2012/Windows
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Printer properties .
Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
Click Start Devices and Printers .
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Printer properties .
Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers .
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Properties .
Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Printers dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
Click Start Control Panel Printers .
Right-click the printer icon of the Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn , and then select Properties .
Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.
Click Apply , and then click OK .
Close the Printers dialog box.
Installing Optional Accessory 51
52 Installing Optional Accessory
7
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
To connect your printer to a computer or device, the following specification must be met for each of the connection type:
Connection type
Wireless
Ethernet
USB
Phone connector
Wall jack connector
Connection specifications
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n (Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only)
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000 Base-T
USB 2.0
RJ11
RJ11
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.
2
1
3
4
1 Ethernet port
2 USB port
3 Phone connector
4 Wall jack connector
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer 53
Turning on the Printer
WARNING: Do not use extension cords or power strips.
WARNING: The printer should not be connected to an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system.
NOTE: The
Software and Documentation
disc also contains video instructions. In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy
Install, click Installation Video.
1 Connect the power cable to the power connector on the rear of the printer, and then to a power source.
2 Turn on the printer.
Configuring Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
You need to set the printer language, country, clock date, time, and fax settings when you turn on the printer for the first time.
When you turn the printer on, the wizard screen to perform the initial setup appears on the touch panel. Follow the steps below to set the initial settings.
NOTE: If you do not start configuring the initial settings, the printer automatically restarts in 3 minutes, and the Home screen appears on the touch panel. After that, you can set the following initial setup by enabling panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool if needed.
Power on Wizard on the touch
For more information on operator panel, see "Operator Panel."
For more information on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool , see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
1 The Select Your Language screen appears. a Tap until desired language appears, and then tap the desired language.
English
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
54 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska b Tap Next .
2 The Date & Time screen appears. a b
Tap Time Zone .
Tap until the desired geographic region appears, and then tap the desired geographic region.
c Tap until the desired time zone appears, and then tap the desired time zone.
Geographic Region
Africa
Time Zone
(UTC) Accra, Bamako, Dakar, Nouakchott
(UTC) Casablanca
(UTC +01:00) Algiers, Douala, Libreville, Luanda
(UTC +01:00) Tunis
(UTC +01:00) Windhoek
(UTC +02:00) Cairo
(UTC +02:00) Harare, Johannesburg, Kinshasa, Tripoli
(UTC +03:00) Addis Ababa, Khartoum, Mogadishu, Nairobi
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer 55
Geographic Region
Americas
Antarctica
Time Zone
(UTC -10:00) Adak
(UTC -09:00) Alaska
(UTC -08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -08:00) Tijuana
(UTC -07:00) Arizona, Dawson Creek, Sonora
(UTC -07:00) Chihuahua, Mazatlan
(UTC -07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Cancun, Mexico City, Monterrey
(UTC -06:00) Central America
(UTC -06:00) Central Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Saskatchewan
(UTC -05:00) Atikokan, Resolute
(UTC -05:00) Bogota, Lima, Panama, Quito
(UTC -05:00) Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Port-au-Prince
(UTC -05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -05:00) Grand Turk
(UTC -05:00) Havana
(UTC -04:30) Caracas
(UTC -04:00) Asuncion
(UTC -04:00) Atlantic Time (Canada)
(UTC -04:00) Blanc-Sablon
(UTC -04:00) Caribbean Islands
(UTC -04:00) Cuiaba
(UTC -04:00) Georgetown, La Paz, Manaus
(UTC -04:00) Thule
(UTC -03:30) St. John's
(UTC -03:00) Brasilia, Cayenne, Paramaribo
(UTC -03:00) Buenos Aires
(UTC -03:00) Greenland
(UTC -03:00) Miquelon
(UTC -03:00) Montevideo
(UTC -02:00) Noronha
(UTC -04:00) Palmer Archipelago, Santiago
(UTC -03:00) Rothera
(UTC +03:00) Syowa
(UTC +06:00) Mawson, Vostok
(UTC +07:00) Davis
(UTC +08:00) Casey
(UTC +10:00) Dumont d'Urville
(UTC +12:00) McMurdo
56 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
Geographic Region
Asia
Atlantic Ocean
Time Zone
(UTC +02:00) Amman
(UTC +02:00) Beirut
(UTC +02:00) Damascus
(UTC +02:00) Jerusalem
(UTC +02:00) Nicosia
(UTC +02:00) Palestine
(UTC +03:00) Aden, Baghdad, Qatar, Riyadh
(UTC +03:30) Tehran
(UTC +04:00) Baku
(UTC +04:00) Dubai, Muscat, Tbilisi
(UTC +04:00) Yerevan
(UTC +04:30) Kabul
(UTC +05:00) Aqtau, Aqtobe, Ashgabat, Samarkand
(UTC +05:00) Ekaterinburg
(UTC +05:00) Karachi
(UTC +05:30) Colombo, Kolkata
(UTC +05:45) Kathmandu
(UTC +06:00) Almaty, Bishkek, Dhaka, Thimphu
(UTC +06:00) Novosibirsk, Omsk
(UTC +06:30) Yangon (Rangoon)
(UTC +07:00) Bangkok, Ho Chi Minh, Hovd, Jakarta
(UTC +07:00) Krasnoyarsk
(UTC +08:00) Chongqing, Hong Kong, Shanghai
(UTC +08:00) Irkutsk
(UTC +08:00) Kuala Lumpur, Makassar, Manila, Singapore
(UTC +08:00) Taipei
(UTC +08:00) Ulaan Baatar
(UTC +09:00) Dili, Jayapura
(UTC +09:00) Pyongyang
(UTC +09:00) Seoul
(UTC +09:00) Tokyo
(UTC +09:00) Yakutsk
(UTC +10:00) Sakhalin, Vladivostok
(UTC +11:00) Magadan
(UTC +12:00) Anadyr, Kamchatka
(UTC -04:00) Bermuda
(UTC -04:00) Stanley
(UTC -02:00) South Georgia Island
(UTC -01:00) Azores, Scoresbysund
(UTC -01:00) Cape Verde
(UTC) Reykjavik
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer 57
Geographic Region
Australia
Europe
Indian Ocean
Pacific Ocean
Time Zone
(UTC +08:00) Perth
(UTC +08:45) Eucla
(UTC +09:30) Adelaide
(UTC +09:30) Darwin
(UTC +10:00) Brisbane, Lindeman
(UTC +10:00) Hobart, Melbourne, Sydney
(UTC +10:30) Lord Howe Island
(UTC) Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London
(UTC +01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna
(UTC +01:00) Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Prague
(UTC +01:00) Brussels, Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris
(UTC +01:00) Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb
(UTC +02:00) Athens, Bucharest, Istanbul
(UTC +02:00) Helsinki, Kiev, Riga, Sofia
(UTC +02:00) Kaliningrad, Minsk
(UTC +03:00) Moscow
(UTC +04:00) Samara
(UTC +03:00) Antananarivo, Comoro Islands, Mayotte
(UTC +04:00) Mahe, Reunion
(UTC +04:00) Mauritius
(UTC +05:00) Kerguelen, Maldives
(UTC +06:00) Chagos
(UTC +06:30) Cocos Islands
(UTC +07:00) Christmas Island
(UTC -11:00) Midway Island, Niue, Samoa
(UTC -10:00) Cook Islands, Hawaii, Tahiti
(UTC -09:30) Marquesas Islands
(UTC -09:00) Gambier Islands
(UTC -08:00) Pitcairn Islands
(UTC -06:00) Easter Island
(UTC -06:00) Galapagos Islands
(UTC +09:00) Palau
(UTC +10:00) Guam, Port Moresby, Saipan
(UTC +11:00) Efate, Guadalcanal, Kosrae
(UTC +11:30) Norfolk Island
(UTC +12:00) Auckland
(UTC +12:00) Fiji, Marshall Islands
(UTC +12:45) Chatham
(UTC +13:00) Tongatapu
(UTC +14:00) Kiritimati
58 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
Australia
Austria
Belgium
Canada
Colombia
Denmark
France
Germany
Ireland
Italy
Luxembourg
Malaysia
Mexico
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
Singapore f d e
Tap OK .
Tap Date .
Select a date format from the menu displayed by selecting Format .
YYYY/MM/DD
DD/MM/YYYY
MM/DD/YYYY l j i g h k m
After tapping the box under Year , tap - or +, or use the number pad to enter the desired value. Repeat this step to enter the desired value for Month and Day .
Tap OK .
Tap Time .
Select the time format from 12 Hour or 24 Hour . If you select 12 Hour , select AM or PM .
After tapping the box under Hour , use the number pad to enter the desired value. Repeat this step to enter the desired value for Minute .
Tap OK .
Tap Next .
3 The Fax (Do you want to setup Fax Now?) screen appears.
To set Fax settings, select Yes, Setup FAX and follow the procedure below. To end the settings, select No,
I'll Do It Later and proceed to Step 4. a b c
Enter the fax number of the printer using the number pad.
Tap Country .
Tap until the desired country appears, and then tap the desired country.
The default paper size is automatically set when you select a country.
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
Letter
A4
A4
A4
A4
Letter
Letter
A4
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer 59
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Thailand
United Kingdom
United States
Unknown
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
Letter
Letter d Tap Next .
4 The Setup Complete (Congratulations, setup is complete.) screen appears.
5 Tap OK .
The printer automatically restarts after tapping OK .
60 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
Connecting to a Computer or a Network
NOTE: The
Software and Documentation
disc also contains video instructions. In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy
Install, click Installation Video.
NOTE: Before making connections, be sure to turn off the printer.
Connecting to a Computer Using the USB Cable (Direct Connection)
A local printer is a printer which is directly connected to your computer using the USB cable. If your printer is connected to a network instead of your computer, skip this section and go to "Connecting to a Network Using the
Ethernet Cable."
1 Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the rear of the printer.
1
1
1 USB port
NOTE: Ensure that you match the USB symbol on the cable to the USB symbol on the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of the computer.
CAUTION: Do not connect the printer USB cable to a USB port located on the keyboard.
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer 61
Connecting to a Network Using the Ethernet Cable
1 Connect the Ethernet cable.
1
1
1 Ethernet port
To connect the printer to the network, connect one end of an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on the rear of the printer, and the other end to a LAN drop or hub.
Connecting to a Wireless Network
NOTE: The wireless network connection feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
You can connect the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw to a wireless network, using the built-in wireless network function.
For a wireless connection setup, see "Configuring the Wireless Settings."
NOTE: To use the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw through wireless connection, be sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable.
Connecting to the Telephone Line
CAUTION: Do not connect your printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL). This may damage the printer. To use a DSL, you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter. Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.
NOTE: The
Software and Documentation
disc also contains video instructions. In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy
Install, click Installation Video.
62 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
1 Connect one end of a telephone line cord into the wall jack connector and the other end into an active wall jack.
Wall jack connector
To the wall jack
2 If the "Blue" plug is attached to the phone connector, remove it.
"Blue" plug
Phone connector
3 To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, connect the telephone or answering machine line cord into the phone connector ( ).
To an external telephone or answering machine
Phone connector
If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy,
France and Switzerland), and that you are supplied with a "Yellow" terminator, insert the "Yellow" terminator into the phone connector ( ).
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer 63
"Yellow" terminator
Phone connector
Setting Up the Printer Using Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows ® Only)
NOTE: To set up the printer connected with Macintosh computers or Linux computers, see "Installing Printer Drivers on
Macintosh Computers" or "Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)" respectively.
Basic Setup
To set up the printer, you can use the Dell Printer Easy Install program on the computer running a Microsoft ®
Windows ® operating system.
The program first searches for the printer and grasps how the printer is connected to the computer. Based on that information, the program will automatically try to configure the printer, and install the drivers and software to your computer.
Before starting this basic setup, make sure that the printer is turned off, and ensure the cable connections as follows:
To set up the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw as a wireless printer, disconnect the Ethernet cable from the printer. The printer will be connected to the same wireless network that the computer used is currently connected.
To set up the printer as a network (wired) printer, connect the Ethernet cable to the printer.
To set up the printer as a USB printer, connect the USB cable to the printer.
NOTE: Where the wireless network connection is available, you cannot set up the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw as a USB printer in the basic setup. In this case, set up the printer following the procedures described in "Setting Up the Printer in
Another Connection Method."
NOTE: For Windows Vista ® , you cannot set up the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw automatically as a wireless printer in the basic setup. In this case, set up the printer manually following the procedures described in "Setting Up the Printer in
Another Connection Method."
64 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer into your computer.
The Dell Printer Easy Install program launches automatically.
NOTE: If the Dell Printer Easy Install program does not launch automatically, follow the procedure below.
For Windows Server ® 2008 and Windows Server ® 2008 R2
Click start Run , enter box, and then click OK .
D:\setup_assist.exe
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the Run dialog
For Windows Vista ® and Windows ® 7
Click Start All Programs Accessories Run , enter
D:\setup_assist.exe
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the Run dialog box, and then click OK .
For Windows ® 8, Windows ® 8.1, Windows Server ® 2012, and Windows Server ® 2012 R2
Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Search Type
Windows ® 8 and Windows Server ® 2012 only), and then click Run Type the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click OK .
Run in the search box, click Apps (for
D:\setup_assist.exe
(where D is
2 Turn on the printer.
3 Wait until the screen changes or click Next .
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
4 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print!
screen appears.
5 Eject the Software and Documentation disc.
If the Main Menu of Dell Printer Easy Install Appears Without Starting or Completing the Basic Setup
Proceed to step 4 in "Setting Up the Printer in Another Connection Method," and set up the printer manually following the on-screen instructions.
Setting Up the Printer in Another Connection Method
You can set up the printer, specifying the connection method other than the one used in the basic setup.
Before starting the setup procedure below, make sure that the printer is turned off, and ensure the cable connection as described in "Basic Setup."
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer 65
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer into your computer.
The Dell Printer Easy Install program launches automatically.
2 Click Main Menu .
The Main Menu screen appears.
3 Turn on the printer.
4 Click Setup .
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
5 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print!
screen appears.
6 Eject the Software and Documentation disc.
Configuring the Wireless Settings
NOTE: The wireless network connection feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
This section describes how to configure the wireless connection on Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.
The specifications of the wireless connection are described below.
Item
Connectivity Technology
Compliant Standards
Specification
Wireless
IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n
66 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
Item
Bandwidth
Data Transfer Rate
Security
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) *2
Specification
2.4 GHz
IEEE 802.11n: 65 Mbps
IEEE 802.11g: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, and 6 Mbps
IEEE 802.11b: 11, 5.5, 2, and 1 Mbps
64 (40-bit key)/128 (104-bit key) WEP,
WPA- PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA-Enterprise (TKIP, AES) *1 ,
WPA2-Enterprise (AES) *1
Push-Button Configuration (PBC),
Personal Identification Number (PIN)
*1 EAP method supports PEAPv0, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS PAP, and EAP-TTLS CHAP.
*2 WPS 2.0 compliant. WPS 2.0 works on access points with the following encryption types: Mixed mode PSK,
WPA-PSK AES, WPA2-PSK AES, WPA-PSK TKIP, Open (No Security)
Determining the Wireless Network Settings
You need to know the settings for the wireless network to set up the wireless printer. For details of the settings, contact your network administrator.
Wireless Settings
Security Settings
*
SSID
Network Mode
Security
Transmit Key
WEP Key
Passphrase
Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network with up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Specifies the network mode from Ad-hoc or Infrastructure.
Selects the encryption type from No Security, Mixed mode PSK *
TKIP, WPA2-PSK-AES, and WEP.
, WPA-PSK-
Specifies the transmit key from the list.
Specifies the WEP key used through the wireless network only when WEP is selected as the encryption type.
Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 bytes long and the hexadecimal characters of 64 bytes long only when Mixed mode
PSK * , or WPA2-PSK-AES is selected as the encryption type.
Mixed mode PSK automatically selects an available encryption type from WPA-PSK-TKIP, WPA-PSK-AES, or WPA2-PSK-AES.
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer 67
You can select a method to configure the Wireless Connection from the following:
• Wizard Setup through Dell Printer Easy Install
• WPS-PBC *1*3
• WPS-PIN *2*3
• Auto SSID Setup
• Manual SSID Setup
• Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
*1 WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.
*2 WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by entering PIN assignments in the printer and computer. This setting, performed through access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.
*3 WPS 2.0 compliant. WPS 2.0 works on access points with the following encryption types: Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK AES, WPA2-
PSK AES, WPA-PSK TKIP, Open (No Security)
NOTE: If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable , you need to enter the four-digit password to enter the Admin
Settings menu.
NOTE: For details about using WPA-Enterprise-AES or WPA2-Enterprise-AES, see "Using Digital Certificates."
Configuring the Wireless Settings Using Dell Printer Easy Install
1 Insert the Software and Documentation
Install program launches automatically.
disc provided with the printer into your computer. The Dell Printer Easy
2 Click Main Menu .
68 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
3 Click Change .
4 Select Configure the Wi-Fi settings , and then click Next .
5 Follow the on-screen instructions, and configure the wireless settings of the printer.
For WPS-PBC , WPS-PIN , Auto SSID Setup , Manual SSID Setup , and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool , see the following instructions.
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer 69
Configuring the Wireless Settings Without Using Dell Printer Easy Install
WPS-PBC
You can start Push Button Configuration only from the operator panel.
NOTE: WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing WPS-
PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.
NOTE: Before starting WPS-PBC, confirm the position of the WPS button (button name may vary) on the wireless LAN access point. For information about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless
LAN access point.
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings .
3 Tap Network .
4 Tap Wi-Fi .
5 Tap WPS Setup .
6 Tap Push Button Configuration .
7 Tap Start Configuration .
Ensure that the message Push WPS Button on router is displayed, and start the WPS-PBC on the wireless
LAN access point (Registrar) within 2 minutes.
8 When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.
WPS-PIN
The PIN code of WPS-PIN can only be configured from the operator panel.
NOTE: WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by entering PIN assignments to a printer and computer. This setting, performed through an access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless router support WPS.
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings .
3 Tap Network .
4 Tap Wi-Fi .
5 Tap WPS Setup .
6 Tap PIN Code .
7 Write down the displayed 8-digit PIN code or tap Print PIN Code . The PIN code is printed.
8 Tap Start Configuration .
9 Ensure that the message Operate Wireless Router is displayed, and enter the PIN code displayed on step
7 into the wireless LAN access point (Registrar).
NOTE: For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point.
10 When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.
70 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
Auto SSID Setup
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings .
3 Tap Network .
4 Tap Wi-Fi .
5 Tap Wi-Fi Setup Wizard .
The printer automatically searches the access points on wireless network.
6 Tap until the desired access point appears, and then select the access point.
If the desired access point does not appear, go to "Manual SSID Setup."
NOTE: Some hidden SSID may not be displayed. If the SSID is not detected turn on SSID broadcast from the router.
7 Tap Next .
8 Enter the WEP key or passphrase.
When the encryption type of the selected access point is WEP in step 6: a b
Tap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.
Tap OK .
When the encryption type of the selected access point is WPA, WPA2 or Mixed in step 6: a b
Tap the Passphrase text box, and then enter the passphrase.
Tap OK .
9 The Restart System screen appears.
10 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
Manual SSID Setup
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings .
3 Tap Network .
4 Tap Wi-Fi .
5 Tap Wi-Fi Setup Wizard .
6 Tap the Manual SSID Setup check box, and then tap Next .
7 Enter the SSID, and then tap Next .
8 Select the network mode from Infrastructure and Ad-hoc depending on your environment, and then tap
Next .
If you select Infrastructure , proceed to step 9.
If you select Ad-hoc , proceed to step 10.
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer 71
9 Select the encryption type from No Security , Mixed mode PSK , WPA2-PSK-AES , or WEP .
If you do not set security for your wireless network: a until appears, and then tap No Security .
b Tap OK .
To use Mixed mode PSK or WPA2-PSK-AES encryption: a b until , or WPA2-PSK-AES appears, and then tap the desired encryption type.
Tap the Passphrase text box, and then enter the passphrase.
c Tap OK .
To use WEP encryption: a b c until appears, and then tap WEP .
Tap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.
Tap Transmit Key , and then select the desired transmit key from Auto or WEP Key 1 to WEP Key 4 .
d Tap OK .
Proceed to step 11.
10 Select the encryption type from No Security or WEP .
If you do not set security for your wireless network: a until appears, and then tap No Security .
b Tap OK .
To use WEP encryption: a b c until appears, and then tap WEP .
Tap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.
Tap Transmit Key , and then select the desired transmit key from Auto or WEP Key 1 to WEP Key 4 .
d Tap OK .
11 The Restart System screen appears.
12 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
NOTE: For details about using WPA-Enterprise-AES or WPA2-Enterprise-AES, see "Using Digital Certificates."
1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2 Connect the printer to the network with an Ethernet cable.
For details about how to connect the Ethernet cable, see "Connecting to a Computer or a Network."
3 Turn on the printer.
4 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.
5 Click Print Server Settings .
6 Click Print Server Settings tab.
7 Click Wi-Fi .
8 Enter the SSID in the SSID text box.
9 Select Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure in the Network Type drop-down list box.
72 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
10 Select the encryption type from No Security , WEP, WPA-PSK-AES/WEP2-PSK AES , and Mixed Mode PSK in the Encryption drop-down list box, and then set each item for the encryption type selected.
NOTE: For details on each item, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
11 Click Apply New Settings to apply the settings.
12 Turn off the printer, disconnect the Ethernet cable and turn it on again.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
Reconfiguring the Wireless Settings
To change the wireless settings from your computer, perform the following.
NOTE: To change the wireless settings through wireless connection, ensure that the wireless connection setting is completed in "Configuring the Wireless Settings."
Reconfiguring the Wireless Settings Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
NOTE: The following settings are available when the network mode is set to infrastructure in "Configuring the Wireless
Settings."
1 Check the IP address of the printer.
a b c
Press the (Information) button.
Tap About This MFP .
Tap the Network tab.
d until appears, and then check the IP address displayed in the IP(v4)
Address .
2 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.
3 Click Print Server Settings .
4 Click Print Server Settings tab.
5 Click Wi-Fi .
6 Change the wireless settings of the printer.
Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer 73
7 Reboot the printer.
8 Change the wireless settings on your computer or access point accordingly.
NOTE: To change the wireless settings on your computer, refer to the manuals provided with the wireless adapter or if your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using that tool.
Reconfiguring the Wireless Settings Using Dell Printer Easy Install
1 Insert the Software and Documentation
Install program launches automatically.
disc provided with the printer into your computer. The Dell Printer Easy
2 Click Main Menu .
3 Click Change .
The Configure Printer window appears.
4 Select Configure the Wi-Fi settings , and then click Next .
5 Follow the on-screen instructions, and change the wireless settings of the printer.
Reconfiguring the Wireless Settings Using Configuration Tool
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer - H815dw or Dell Smart
Multifunction Printer - S2815dn Configuration Tool .
The Configure Printer window of the Dell Printer Easy Install program appears.
2 Select Configure the wireless network settings , and click Next .
3 Follow the on-screen instructions, and change the wireless settings of the printer.
74 Connecting and Setting Up Your Printer
8
Setting the IP Address
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.
Assigning an IP Address
An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are delimited by a period and can include up to three digits in each section, for example, 111.222.33.44
.
You can select the IP mode from Dual Stack, IPv4, and IPv6. If your network supports both IPv4 and IPv6, select
Dual Stack.
Select the IP mode of your environment, and then set IP address, subnet mask (for IPv4 only), and gateway address.
CAUTION: Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues.
NOTE: Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system administrator.
NOTE: When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 mode, use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. To display the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the link-local address. To confirm the link-local address, print a system settings report and check the Link-Local Address under Network (Wired) or Network (Wireless).
For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."
NOTE: If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable , you need to enter the four-digit password to enter the Admin
Settings menu.
When Using the Dell Printer Easy Install
1 Insert the Software and Documentation
Install program launches automatically.
disc provided with the printer into your computer. The Dell Printer Easy
2 Click Main Menu .
Setting the IP Address 75
3 Click Change .
The Configure Printer window appears.
4 Select Configure the IP address settings , and then click Next .
5 Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
When Using the Operator Panel
For more information on using the operator panel, see "Operator Panel."
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings .
3 Tap Network .
4 Do either of the following:
When connecting to network with the Ethernet cable:
Tap Ethernet .
When connecting to network through wireless connection (Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only):
Tap Wi-Fi .
5 Tap IP Mode .
6 Tap IPv4 Mode , and then tap OK .
76 Setting the IP Address
7 Tap TCP / IP appears, and then tap TCP / IP .
8 Tap Get IP Address .
9 Tap Panel , and then tap OK .
10 Tap IP Address .
The cursor is located at the first octet of the IP address.
11 Use the number pad to enter the first octet of the IP address, and then tap
The cursor moves to the next digit.
NOTE: You can only enter one octet at a time and must tap
12 Enter the rest of the octets, and then tap OK .
13 Tap Subnet Mask .
14 Repeat steps 11 and 12 to set Subnet Mask.
15 Tap Gateway Address .
16 Repeat steps 11 and 12 to set Gateway Address.
17 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
.
after entering each octet.
When Using the Tool Box
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer - H815dw or Dell Smart
Multifunction Printer - S2815dn Tool Box .
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.
The TCP/IP Settings page appears.
4 Select the mode from IP Address Mode , and then enter the values in IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway
Address.
5 Click Apply New Settings to take effect.
You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the printer drivers with the installer. When you use the
Wireless or Ethernet Connection feature, and the Get IP Address is set to AutoIP or DHCP on the printer, you can set the IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the printer selection window.
Verifying the IP Settings
You can confirm the settings by using the operator panel, printing the system settings report, or using the ping command.
Verifying the Settings Using Operator Panel
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap About This MFP .
3 Tap the Network tab.
4 Verify the IP address displayed in IP(v4) Address .
Setting the IP Address 77
Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report
1 Print the system settings report.
For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."
2 Verify the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are listed in the system settings report under
Network (Wired) or Network (Wireless) .
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0
(the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your printer, see "Assigning an IP Address."
Verifying the Settings Using Ping Command
Send a ping request to the printer and verify that it responds. For example, at a command prompt on a network computer, type "ping" followed by the new IP address (for example, 192.168.0.11): ping 192.168.0.11
If the printer is active on the network, you will receive a reply.
78 Setting the IP Address
9
Loading Paper
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.
NOTE: The
Software and Documentation
disc also contains video instructions. In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy
Install, click Installation Video.
1 Pull the tray out of the printer about 200 mm.
2 Hold the tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.
Loading Paper 79
3 Adjust the paper guides.
NOTE: Extend the front side of the tray when you load Legal-size paper.
4 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets and fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.
5 Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.
6 Align the width guides against the edges of the paper.
NOTE: When loading user-specified print media, adjust the width guides and slide the extendable part of the tray by pinching the length guide and sliding it until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper.
80 Loading Paper
7 After confirming that the guides are securely adjusted, insert the tray into the printer.
NOTE: If the front side of the tray is extended, the tray protrudes when it is inserted into the printer.
8 On the touch panel, tap Size .
NOTE: Set the same paper size and type as the actual paper being loaded. An error may occur if the paper size or type setting is different from the loaded paper.
9 Select until the desired paper size appears, and then select the desired paper size.
10 Tap Type .
11 Select until the desired paper type appears, and then select the desired paper type.
12 Select OK.
Loading Paper 81
82 Loading Paper
10
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status
Before installing the printer driver on your computer, check the IP address of your printer by performing one of the procedures in "Verifying the IP Settings."
Changing the firewall settings before installing your printer
If you are running one of the following operating systems, you must change the firewall settings before installing the
Dell™ printer software:
• Microsoft ® Windows Vista ®
• Windows ® 7
• Windows ® 8
• Windows ® 8.1
• Windows Server ® 2008
• Windows Server ® 2008 R2
• Windows Server ® 2012
• Windows Server ® 2012 R2
The following procedure uses Windows ® 7 as an example.
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.
2 Click Start Control Panel .
3 Select System and Security .
4 Click Allow a program through Windows Firewall .
5 Click Change settings Allow another program .
6 Check Browse .
7 Type D:\setup_assist.exe
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the File name text box, and then click Open .
8 Click Add , and then click OK .
Starting Dell Printer Easy Install
1 Insert the Software and Documentation
Install program launches automatically.
disc provided with the printer into your computer. The Dell Printer Easy
NOTE: If the Dell Printer Easy Install program does not launch automatically, follow the procedure below.
For Windows Server ® 2008 and Windows Server ® 2008 R2
Click start Run , enter box, and then click OK .
D:\setup_assist.exe (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the Run dialog
For Windows Vista ® and Windows ® 7
Click Start All Programs Accessories Run , enter D:\setup_assist.exe the optical drive) in the Run dialog box, and then click OK .
(where D is the drive letter of
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers 83
For Windows ® 8, Windows ® 8.1, Windows Server ® 2012, and Windows Server ® 2012 R2
Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Search Type
Windows ® 8 and Windows Server ® 2012 only), and then click Run Type the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click OK .
Run in the search box, click Apps (for
D:\setup_assist.exe
(where D is
2 Click Main Menu .
The main menu window appears.
USB Cable Connection Setup
NOTE: If you are connecting the printer to a network, see "Network Connection Setup."
For installing PCL, PS and Fax printer driver
1 Start the Dell Printer Easy Install program, following the procedures shown in "Starting Dell Printer Easy Install."
2 In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy Install , click Connect .
84 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers
3 Select USB Cable Connection , and then click Next .
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and the printer with a USB cable, and then turn the printer on.
The Plug and Play installation starts and the installation software proceeds to the next page automatically.
5 Select either Typical Installation (recommended) or Custom Installation from the installation wizard, and then click Next . If you select Custom Installation , you can select the specific software you want to install.
6 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print!
screen appears.
If you want to verify installation, click Print Test Page before clicking Finish .
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver
NOTE: XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows Vista
Vista ® 64-bit Edition, Windows Server ®
Windows ®
Server ®
7 64-bit Edition, Windows ®
2012, and Windows Server ®
2008, Windows Server
8, Windows ®
® 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server
8 64-bit Edition, Windows ® 8.1, Windows
®
® , Windows
2008 R2, Windows ® 7,
® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows
2012 R2.
NOTE: If you are using Windows Vista
Windows ®
® or Windows Server ® 2008, you need to install Service Pack 2 or later, and then the
Platform Update (KB971644). The update (KB971644) is available for download from Windows Update.
Windows Vista ® or Windows Vista ® 64-bit Edition
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers .
3 Click Add a printer .
4 Click Add a local printer .
5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next .
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse , and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK .
9 Select your printer name and click Next .
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next . To use this printer as the default printer, select the check box displayed under the Printer name , and then click Next .
Installation starts.
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers 85
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue .
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.
11 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
12 Click Finish .
Windows Server ® 2008 or Windows Server ® 2008 64-bit Edition
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers .
3 Click Add a printer .
4 Click Add a local printer .
5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next .
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse , and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK .
9 Select your printer name and click Next .
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next .
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next .
11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer .
If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it .
12 Click Next .
Installation starts.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
14 Click Finish .
Windows ® 7, Windows ® 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server ® 2008 R2
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start Devices and Printers .
3 Click Add a printer .
When you use Windows Server ® 2008 R2, click Add a local or network printer as an administrator .
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes .
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.
4 Click Add a local printer .
5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next .
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse , and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
86 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers
8 Click OK .
9 Select your printer name and click Next .
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next .
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next .
11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer .
If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it .
12 Click Next .
Installation starts.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
14 Click Finish .
Windows ® 8, Windows ®
Windows Server ®
8 64-bit Edition, Windows
2012 R2
® 8.1, Windows ® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server ® 2012, or
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_H815dw_S2815dn.zip
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel .
3 Click Hardware and Sound ( Hardware for Windows Server ®
Printers Add a printer .
2012/Windows Server ® 2012 R2) Devices and
4 Click The printer that I want isn't listed .
5 Select Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings , and then click Next .
6 Select the port connected to your printer, and then click Next .
7 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
8 Click Browse , and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
9 Click OK .
10 Select your printer name and click Next .
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next . Installation starts.
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer . If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it . Click Next .
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation. To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.
14 Click Finish .
Network Connection Setup
NOTE: To use this printer in a Linux environment, you need to install a Linux driver. For more information on how to install and use these, see "Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)."
For installing PCL, PS and Fax printer driver
1 Start the Dell Printer Easy Install program, following the procedures shown in "Starting Dell Printer Easy Install."
2 In the main menu window of Dell Printer Easy Install , click Connect .
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers 87
3 Select Wireless or Ethernet Connection , and then click Next .
4 Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click Next . If the target printer is not displayed on the list, click the (Refresh) button to refresh the list or click add printer manually to add a printer to the list manually. You may specify the IP address and port name at this point.
If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select the I am setting up this printer on a server check box.
NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0
is displayed in the installer. Before you can continue, you must enter a valid IP address.
NOTE:
Server ®
In some cases,
Windows ® 7 64-bit Edition, Windows
2012, and Windows Server and Windows ®
Windows Security Alert
64-bit Edition, Windows Server ®
®
®
is displayed in this step when you use Windows Vista
2008, Windows Server
8, Windows ®
® 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server
8 64-bit Edition, Windows
2012 R2. In this case, select
7), and then continue the procedure.
® 8.1, Windows
Unblock (Allow access
® , Windows Vista ®
® 2008 R2, Windows ® 7,
® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows
for Windows Server ® 2008 R2
5 Specify the printer settings, and then click Next .
a Enter the printer name.
b c
If you want to set the printer as the default printer, select the Set this printer as default check box.
If you want to install the PostScript 3 Compatible printer driver, select the PS Driver check box.
If you want to install the Fax Driver, select the Fax Driver check box.
d If you want other users on the network to access the printer, select Share this printer with other computers on the network , and then enter a share name that users can identify.
88 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers
6 Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click Install . If you want to change the installation destination, click Change Destination Folder and specify a new location.
7 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print!
screen appears.
If you want to verify installation, click Print Test Page before clicking Finish .
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver
NOTE:
Vista ®
XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows Vista
64-bit Edition, Windows Server ®
Windows ®
Server ®
7 64-bit Edition, Windows ®
2012, and Windows Server ®
2008, Windows Server
8, Windows ®
® 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server
8 64-bit Edition, Windows ® 8.1, Windows
®
® , Windows
2008 R2, Windows ® 7,
® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows
2012 R2.
Windows Vista ® or Windows Vista ® 64-bit Edition
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers .
3 Click Add a printer .
4 Click Add a network , wireless or Bluetooth printer .
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed .
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name , and then click Next .
7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type , and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address , and then click
Next .
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue .
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.
8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse , and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
10 Click OK .
11 Select your printer name and click Next .
12 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next .
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next .
Installation starts.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
14 Click Finish .
Windows Server ® 2008 or Windows Server ® 2008 64-bit Edition
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers .
3 Click Add a printer .
4 Click Add a network , wireless or Bluetooth printer .
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers 89
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed .
When you select your printer, go to step 8.
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed , go to step 6.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name , and then click Next .
7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type , and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address , and then click
Next .
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue .
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.
8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse , and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
10 Click OK .
11 Select your printer name and click Next .
12 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next .
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next .
13 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer .
If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it .
14 Click Next .
Installation starts.
15 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
16 Click Finish .
Windows Server ® 2008 R2
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start Devices and Printers .
3 Click Add a printer .
4 Click Add a network , wireless or Bluetooth printer .
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed .
NOTE: When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, Find a printer by name or TCP/IP address screen appears. Find your printer on the screen.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue .
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse , and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK .
9 Select your printer name and click Next .
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next .
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next .
90 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers
11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer .
If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it .
12 Click Next .
Installation starts.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
14 Click Finish .
Windows ® 7 or Windows ® 7 64-bit Edition
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H815dw_S2815dn.zip
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start Devices and Printers .
3 Click Add a printer .
4 Click Add a network , wireless or Bluetooth printer .
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed .
When you select your printer, go to step 8.
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed , go to step 6.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name , and then click Next .
7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type , and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address , and then click
Next .
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes .
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.
8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse , and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
10 Click OK .
11 Select your printer name and click Next .
12 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next .
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next .
13 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer .
If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it .
14 Click Next .
Installation starts.
15 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
16 Click Finish .
Windows ® 8, Windows ®
Windows Server ®
8 64-bit Edition, Windows
2012 R2
® 8.1, Windows ® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server ® 2012, or
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_H815dw_S2815dn.zip
(where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel .
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers 91
3 Click Hardware and Sound ( Hardware for Windows Server ®
Printers Add a printer .
2012/Windows Server ® 2012 R2) Devices and
4 Click The printer that I want isn't listed .
5 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP or host name , and then click Next .
6 Select TCP/IP Device from Device Type , enter the IP address in the Hostname or IP address box, and then click
Next .
7 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
8 Click Browse , and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
9 Click OK .
10 Select your printer name and click Next .
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next . Installation starts.
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer . If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it . Click Next .
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation. To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.
14 Click Finish .
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your desk. You can view and/or change the printer settings, monitor toner level, and acknowledge the timing of ordering replacement consumables. You can click the Dell supplies link for ordering supplies.
NOTE: The
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
is not available when the printer is directly connected to a computer or a print server.
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool , type the printer's IP address in your web browser. The printer configuration appears on the screen.
You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention.
To set up e-mail alerts:
1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool .
2 Click E-Mail Server Settings Overview link.
3 Under E-Mail Server Settings , enter the Primary SMTP Gateway , Reply Address , and your or key operator's e-mail address in the e-mail list box.
4 Click Apply New Settings .
NOTE:
Connection pending until printer sends an alert
is displayed on the SMTP server until an error occurs.
Setting Up for Shared Printing
You can share your USB connected printer with other computers (clients) on the same network.
To share your USB connected printer, enable shared printing when installing the printer driver. You can also enable shared printing by following the procedures below.
NOTE: Printer utilities such as Status Monitor cannot be used from a network client.
92 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers
Enabling Shared Printing from the Computer
Windows Server ® 2003 or Windows Server ® 2003 x64 Edition
1 Click start Printers and Faxes .
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Properties .
3 On the Sharing tab, select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.
5 Click OK .
If you are missing files, you are prompted to insert the server operating system CD.
Windows Vista ® or Windows Vista ® 64-bit Edition
1 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers .
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing .
3 Click Change sharing options .
The message Windows needs your permission to continue appears.
4 Click Continue .
5 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
6 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.
7 Click OK .
Windows Server ® 2008 or Windows Server ® 2008 64-bit Edition
1 Click Start Control Panel Printers .
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing .
3 Click Change Sharing Options if exists.
4 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
5 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.
6 Click OK .
Windows ® 7, Windows ® 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server ® 2008 R2
1 Click Start Devices and Printers .
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties .
3 On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options if exists.
Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.
5 Click Apply , and then click OK .
Windows ®
Server ®
8, Windows
2012 R2
® 8 64-bit Edition, Windows ® 8.1, Windows ® 8.1 64-bit Edition, Windows Server ® 2012, or Windows
1 On the Desktop screen, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel Hardware and Sound ( Hardware for Windows Server ® 2012/Windows Server ® 2012 R2) Devices and Printers .
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties .
3 On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options if exists.
Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers 93
4 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
5 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.
6 Click Apply , and then click OK .
Checking the Shared Printer
To confirm that the printer is properly shared:
• Ensure that the printer object in the Printers , Printers and Faxes , or Devices and Printers folder is shared. The shared icon is shown under the printer icon.
• From a network client, browse Network or My Network Places . Find the host name of the server and the shared name you assigned to the printer.
After you have checked that the printer is shared, use methods such as Windows ® printer from a network client.
Point and Print to use the shared
NOTE: If the OS bit editions (32/64 bit edition) differ between a print server and a client computer, you need to manually add the printer driver for the client computer edition on the server. Otherwise, the printer driver cannot be installed on the client computer using methods such as Point and Print. For example, if the print server runs on Windows Vista ® 32-bit edition, while the client computer runs on Windows
64-bit client on the 32-bit server.
® 7 64-bit edition, follow the procedures below to additionally install the printer driver for a Click Additional Drivers on the screen for sharing printers.
For details about how to display this screen, see "Enabling Shared Printing from the Computer." b c d
Select the x64 check box, and then click OK .
Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.
Click Browse to specify the folder that contains the 64-bit OS driver, and then click OK .
Installation starts.
94 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers
Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers
11
Installing the Drivers and Software
1 Run the Software and Documentation disc on the Macintosh computer.
2 For Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, double-click the Dell MFP H815dw Installer icon, and then click Continue .
For Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn, double-click the Dell MFP S2815dn Installer icon, and then click Continue .
3 When the popup dialog box prompts you for confirming the program included in the installation package, click
Continue .
4 Click Continue on the Important Information screen.
5 Select a language for the Software License Agreement screen.
6 After reading the Software License Agreement , click Continue .
7 If you agree to the terms of the Software License Agreement , click Agree to continue the installation process.
8 Confirm the installation location.
9 Click Install to perform the standard installation.
If you want to select a custom installation, click Customize to select items that you want to install.
• Dell MFP H815dw Printer Driver or Dell MFP S2815dn Printer Driver
• Dell MFP H815dw Fax Driver or Dell MFP S2815dn Fax Driver
• Dell MFP H815dw Scan Driver or Dell MFP S2815dn Scan Driver
• Dell Printer Status Monitor
10 Type the administrator's name and password, and then click Install Software .
11 Click Continue Installation to continue the installation.
12 When the message The installation was successful.
appears, click Log Out to complete installation.
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, OS X 10.7, OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, or OS X 10.10
When Using a USB connection
1 Turn on the printer.
2 Connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer.
The printer is automatically added to your Macintosh computer.
When Using IP Printing
1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected via network.
If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.
Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers 95
3 For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6: Open the System Preferences , and click Print & Fax .
For OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Open the System Preferences , and click Print & Scan .
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Open the System Preferences , and click Printers & Scanners .
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, select Add Printer or Scanner ( Add Other Printer or Scanner for OS X 10.7), and select IP .
For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6, just click the Plus (+) sign and select IP .
5 Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol .
6 Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.
7 For Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, and OS X 10.7: Select Dell MFP H815dw v3012 PS vX.X
or Dell MFP
S2815dn v3012 PS vX.X
for Print Using .
For OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, and OS X 10.10: Select Dell MFP H815dw v3012 PS vX.X
or Dell MFP S2815dn v3012 PS vX.X
for Use .
NOTE: When printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.
8 Click Add .
9 Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue .
10 For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Fax dialog box.
For OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Scan dialog box.
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Printers & Scanners dialog box.
When Using Bonjour
1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected via network.
If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.
3 For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6: Open the System Preferences , and click Print & Fax .
For OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Open the System Preferences , and click Print & Scan .
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Open the System Preferences , and click Printers & Scanners .
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, select Add Printer or Scanner ( Add Other Printer or Scanner for OS X 10.7), and select
Default .
For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6, just click the Plus (+) sign and select Default .
5 Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Name ( Printer Name for Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, and
OS X 10.7) list.
6 For Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, and OS X 10.7: Name and Print Using are automatically entered.
For OS X 10.8, OS X 10.9, and OS X 10.10: Name and Use are automatically entered.
NOTE: If AirPrint Printer is automatically selected for Print Using (or Use), select Dell MFP H815dw v3012 PS vX.X or Dell
MFP S2815dn v3012 PS vX.X manually.
7 Click Add .
8 Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue .
96 Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers
9 For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Fax dialog box.
For OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Scan dialog box.
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Printers & Scanners dialog box.
Configuring Settings
Configure the options available for the printer.
1 For Mac OS X 10.5 and Mac OS X 10.6: Open the System Preferences , and click Print & Fax .
For OS X 10.7 and OS X 10.8: Open the System Preferences , and click Print & Scan .
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Open the System Preferences , and click Printers & Scanners .
2 Select the printer in the Printers list, and click Options & Supplies .
3 For Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, OS X 10.7, and OS X 10.8: Select Driver , select the options that can be configured for the printer, and then click OK .
For OS X 10.9 and OS X 10.10: Select Options , select the options that can be configured for the printer, and then click OK .
Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers 97
98 Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers
12
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)
This section provides information for installing or setting up the printer driver with CUPS (Common UNIX Printing
System) on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 (32/64bit), SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 (32/64bit), or Ubuntu 12.04
LTS (32/64bit).
Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop
Setup Overview
1 Install the printer driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Specify the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.
Installing the Printer Driver
1 Select Applications System Tools Terminal .
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.
For the 32-bit architecture su
(Type the administrator password) rpm -ivh (Type the file path)/Dell-MFP-H815dw-
S2815dn-*.*-*.i686.rpm
For the 64-bit architecture su
(Type the administrator password) rpm -ivh (Type the file path)/Dell-MFP-H815dw-
S2815dn-*.*-*.x86_64.rpm
The printer driver is installed.
Setting Up the Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1 Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.
2 Click Administration .
3 Click Add Printer .
4 Type root as the user name, type the administrator password, and click OK .
For network connections: a Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu, and click Continue .
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS) 99
b Type the IP address of the printer in Connection , and click Continue .
Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
(the IP address of the printer)
For USB connections: a Select Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn from the Local Printers menu, and click Continue .
5 Type the name of the printer in the Name box in the Add Printer window, and click Continue .
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further information.
If you want to share the printer, select the Share This Printer check box.
6 Select Dell from the Make menu, and click Continue .
7 Select Dell MFP H815dw vXXXX PS or Dell MFP S2815dn vXXXX PS from the Model menu, and click Add
Printer .
The setup is complete.
Printing From the Applications
When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.
However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).
In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."
Setting the Default Queue
1 Select Applications System Tools Terminal .
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator password) lpadmin -d (Type the queue name)
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as 2-sided printing.
1 Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.
2 Click Administration .
3 Click Manage Printers .
4 Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options.
5 Select Set Default Options from the Administration menu.
6 Click the desired setting item, specify the required settings, and click Set Default Options .
The message Printer xxx default options have been set successfully.
appears.
The setting is complete.
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
1 Select Applications System Tools Terminal .
2 Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
100 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)
su
(Type the administrator password)
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the print queue name)
3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
4 Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator password) rpm -e Dell-MFP-H815dw-S2815dn
The printer driver is uninstalled.
Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11
Setup Overview
1 Install the printer driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Specify the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.
Installing the Printer Driver
1 Select Computer More Applications...
and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.
For the 32-bit architecture su
(Type the administrator password) rpm -ivh (Type the file path)/ Dell-MFP-H815dw-
S2815dn-*.*-*.i686.rpm
For the 64-bit architecture su
(Type the administrator password) rpm -ivh (Type the file path)/ Dell-MFP-H815dw-
S2815dn-*.*-*.x86_64.rpm
The printer driver is installed.
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS) 101
Setting Up the Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1 Select Computer More Applications...
, and select YaST on the Application Browser.
2 Type the administrator password, and click Continue .
YaST Control Center is activated.
3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Center , and select Printer .
The Printer Configurations dialog box opens.
For network connections: a b
Click Add .
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens.
Click Connection Wizard .
The Connection Wizard dialog box opens.
f e c d
Select Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol from Access Network Printer or Printserver Box via .
Type the IP address of the printer in IP Address or Host Name: .
Select Dell in the Select the printer manufacturer: drop-down menu.
Click OK .
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appears.
g For Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, select Dell MFP H815dw vXXXX PS [Dell/
Dell_MFP_H815dw.ppd.gz] from the Assign Driver list.
For Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn, select Dell MFP S2815dn vXXXX PS [Dell/
Dell_MFP_S2815dn.ppd.gz] from the Assign Driver list.
NOTE: You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.
h Confirm the settings, and click OK .
For USB connections: a b c
Click Add .
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens.
The printer name is displayed in the Determine Connection list.
For Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, select Dell MFP H815dw vXXXX PS [Dell/
Dell_MFP_H815dw.ppd.gz] from the Assign Driver list.
For Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn, select Dell MFP S2815dn vXXXX PS [Dell/
Dell_MFP_S2815dn.ppd.gz] from the Assign Driver list.
NOTE: You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.
Confirm the settings, and click OK .
Printing From the Applications
When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.
However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).
In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."
102 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)
Setting the Default Queue
You can set the default queue when you add the printer.
1 Select Computer More Applications...
, and select YaST on the Application Browser.
2 Type the administrator password, and click Continue .
YaST Control Center is activated.
3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Cente r, and select Printer .
The Printer Configurations dialog box opens.
4 Click Edit .
A dialog box to modify the specified queue opens.
5 Confirm that the printer you want to set is selected in the Connection list.
6 Select the Default Printer check box.
7 Confirm the settings, and click OK .
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as 2-sided printing.
1 Open a web browser.
2 Type http://localhost:631/admin in Location , and press <Enter>.
3 Click Manage Printers .
4 Click Set Printer Options of the printer for which you want to specify the printing options.
5 Specify the required settings, and click Set Printer Options .
6 Type root as the user name, type the administrator password, and click OK .
NOTE: Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If you have not set it, go to
"Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator."
The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.
The setting is complete. Execute printing from the application.
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS) 103
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator
You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as the printer administrator.
1 Select Computer More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator password) lppasswd -g sys -a root
(Type the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password prompt.)
(Retype the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password again prompt.)
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
1 Select Computer More Applications...
and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
su
(Type the administrator password)
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the printer queue name)
3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
4 Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator password) rpm -e Dell-MFP-H815dw-S2815dn
The printer driver is uninstalled.
Operation on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS
Setup Overview
1 Install the printer driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Specify the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.
Installing the Printer Driver
1 Click Dash Home , and enter terminal in the Search text box.
2 Click Terminal in the Applications category of the search results.
104 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)
3 Type the following command in the terminal window.
For the 32-bit architecture sudo dpkg –i (Type the file path) /dell-mfp-S2815dn-
H815dw-*.*-*_i386.deb
(Type the administrator password)
For the 64-bit architecture sudo dpkg –i (Type the file path) /dell-mfp-S2815dn-
H815dw-*.*-*_amd64.deb
(Type the administrator password)
The printer driver is installed.
Setting Up the Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1 Open the URL " http://localhost:631 " using a web browser.
2 Click Administration .
3 Click Add Printer .
4 Type the user name and the administrator password, and click OK .
5 Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection.
For network connections: a b
Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu, and click Continue .
Type the IP address of the printer in Connection , and click Continue .
Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
(the IP address of the printer)
For USB connections: a Select Dell MFP H815dw or Dell MFP S2815dn from the Local Printers menu, and click Continue .
6 Type the name of the printer in the Name box in the Add Printer window, and click Continue .
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further information.
If you want to share the printer, select the Share This Printer check box.
7 Select Dell from the Make menu, and click Continue .
8 Select Dell MFP H815dw vXXXX PS or Dell MFP S2815dn vXXXX PS from the Model menu, and click Add
Printer .
The setup is complete.
Printing From the Applications
When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.
Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS) 105
However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).
In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."
Setting the Default Queue
1 Click Dash Home , and enter terminal in the Search text box.
2 Click Terminal in the Applications category of the search results.
3 Type the following command in the terminal window. sudo lpadmin -d (Type the queue name)
(Type the administrator password)
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as 2-sided printing.
1 Open the URL " http://localhost:631 " using a web browser.
2 Click Administration .
3 Click Manage Printers .
4 Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options.
5 Select Set Default Options from the Administration menu.
6 Click the desired setting item, specify the required settings, and click Set Default Options .
The message Printer xxx default options have been set successfully.
appears.
The setting is complete.
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
1 Click Dash Home , and enter terminal in the Search text box.
2 Click Terminal in the Applications category of the search results.
3 Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue. sudo /usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the print queue name)
(Type the administrator password)
4 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
5 Type the following command in the terminal window. sudo dpkg –r Dell-MFP-H815dw-S2815dn
(Type the administrator password)
The printer driver is uninstalled.
106 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)
Using Your Printer
13 Operator Panel .......................................................................... 109
14 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool................................... 117
15 Understanding the Printer Menus.......................................... 171
16 Print Media Guidelines............................................................. 253
17 Loading Print Media ................................................................. 259
107
108
13
Operator Panel
About the Operator Panel
The operator panel has a touch panel, a ready/error LED, control buttons, and a number pad, which allows you to control the printer.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.
Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 12
Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn
1 2 3 4
11 10 9
5 6 7 8
14 12
1
2
(Home) button
• Moves to the Home screen.
( Login/Logout ) button
• Allows the user to log out.
11 10
Operator Panel 109
3 Touch Panel
• Specifies the settings by directly tapping the screen.
• Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.
4 Ready / Error LED
• Shows a green light when the printer is ready and a blinking green light when data is being received.
• Shows an amber light when an error occurs and a blinking amber light when an unrecoverable print error occurs.
5 Number Pad
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
• Enters numbers and characters.
(Redial / Pause) button
• Calls up the last called number.
• Inserts a pause into a telephone number.
( Copy ) button
• Starts copying the document. Effective only from the Home screen while you are logged in to the printer.
(Power Saver) button
• Enters or exits the Power Saver mode. When the printer is not used for a while, it enters the Power Saver mode to reduce power consumption. When the Power Saver mode is active, the (Power Saver) button blinks.
( NFC ) reader
• Starts communication between the printer and an NFC card or a mobile device with the NFC function when the card or the device is tapped to the reader.
/ ( Speed Dial 1 / Speed Dial 2 ) button
• Starts faxing the document to the number registered as "001" and "002" respectively of the FAX Speed Dial.
Effective only when the Home screen is displayed.
(Delete) button
• Deletes numbers and characters.
(Job Status) button
• Moves to the Job Status screen. From this screen, you can check or cancel active jobs.
(Information) Wi-Fi|WPS button
• Moves to the Information screen. You can access various information and settings menu including Wi-Fi and
Wi-Fi Direct features, check the name of the connected device via Wi-Fi Direct, check consumable levels and network status, and print various types of reports and lists.
(Information) button
• Moves to the Information screen. You can access various information and settings menu, check consumable levels and network status, and print various types of reports and lists.
NOTE: Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting. Be sure to select OK to save the current entry or setting.
110 Operator Panel
Basic Operations on the Touch Panel
You can operate the touch panel as with a smart phone or a tablet.
To Select the Item on the Screen
Tap the item.
Home
Copy Scan to USB
Guest
Scan to
Fax ID Copy Print
To Scroll the Screen or the Listed Items
Swipe the screen by dragging your finger on the screen.
Home
Copy Scan to USB
Guest
Scan to
Fax ID Copy Print
To scroll faster, flick the screen.
Home
Copy Scan to USB
Guest
Scan to
Fax ID Copy Print
NOTE: You cannot swipe or flick on some screens depending on the screen design and specifications. In this case, operate by tapping the buttons shown on the screen.
Operator Panel 111
About the Home Screen
This section describes the fields and buttons on the Home screen which is displayed by pressing the (Home) button while the user is logged in to the printer. As the factory default setting, the Home screen is displayed when the printer is turned on.
NOTE: To display the Home screen, the user must be registered beforehand and log in to the printer. For more information, see
"User Authentication."
Notification Bar
Home
Copy
Fax
Envelope Mode Icon
Lock Icon
Scan to USB
Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon*
Wireless LAN Connection Status Icon*
Guest
Time/Network Information
Account Name
Scan to
Tiles
ID Copy Print
* Available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only
Notification Bar
Displays the status of the printer when the handle is dragged down. To close, drag up the handle.
You can adjust the screen brightness, see the toner information, or monitor the jobs currently progressing. Warnings are displayed in this area, too.
To adjust the screen brightness, drag the slider in Screen Brightness .
To see the Toner Information , tap Supplies .
The information of the toner is displayed.
Lock Icon
Shows that any of the functions controlled by the Functions Control setting has been enabled. While the Lock icon is displayed on the left to the account name, you can access the password-locked functions without entering the password.
Envelope Mode Icon
Appears when the printer is set to the envelope mode.
Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon
Displays the Wi-Fi Direct connection status. This icon is displayed only when Wi-Fi Direct is enabled.
(Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only)
Wireless LAN Connection Status Icon
Displays the intensity of wireless signal when the printer is connected to a wireless network.
(Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only)
112 Operator Panel
Time/Network Information
Displays the current time or the network information (IPv4 address or host name).
Account Name
Displays the name of the user currently logging in to the printer.
Tiles
Displays the tiles of the functions you can select from.
When the tile color is pale and disabled, you cannot select the function.
When the Lock icon is displayed on the tile, the function is controlled by the Functions Control setting and you will need to enter the password to enable the function.
For more information about Functions Control , see "Functions Control."
Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles
To Move the Tiles
Tap and hold the tile you want to move, and drag it to the desired place.
The short orange bar appears between the tiles to show the nearest drop point when you are dragging the tile.
You can move the tile between pages as well.
Guest Home
Copy
Fax
Scan to USB
Guest
Scan to
ID Copy
Home
Add App
ID Copy
To Add the Tiles
Find the Add App tile in the last page of the Home screen, and tap it.
The Apps List screen appears.
Tap the tile you want to add to the Home screen.
Operator Panel 113
To Delete the Tiles
Tap and hold the tile you want to delete. appears. Drag the tile to the icon.
Home
Copy Scan to USB
Guest
Scan to
Fax Print
ID Copy
The confirmation screen is displayed.
Tap OK to delete the tile.
Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel
During operations, a keyboard for entering text sometimes appears. The following describes how to enter text.
Back Done Back Done
QWERTY AZERTY
You can enter the following characters: numbers, alphabets, and symbols.
Back
QWERTZ
Done
Item
Entering alphabets
Entering numbers and symbols
Entering a space
Deleting characters
Description
To enter uppercase letters, tap . To return to the lowercase letters, tap again. To lock to the uppercase letters, double-tap .
Tap
Tap
Tap
.
.
to delete one character at a time.
To Change the Keyboard Layout
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Language Settings .
3 Tap Keyboard Layout .
4 Tap the desired keyboard layout.
5 Tap OK .
114 Operator Panel
Using the Number Pad
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter numbers. For example, when you enter fax number directly.
Number Pad Numbers
7
8
5
6
9
0
3
4
1
2
#
Changing Numbers
If you make a mistake while entering a number, press the the correct number.
(Delete) button to delete the last digit. Then enter
Inserting a Pause
For some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen for a second dial tone. A pause must be entered in order for the access code to function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then press the
(Redial/Pause) button before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on the display when a pause is entered.
Printing a Panel Settings Report
The panel settings report shows current settings for the printer menus. For details about how to print a panel settings report, see "Report / List."
Changing the Language
To change the language used on the touch panel:
Operator Panel 115
When Using the Operator Panel
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Language Settings .
3 Tap Panel Language .
4 Tap until the desired language appears, and then tap the desired language.
5 Tap OK .
When Using the Tool Box
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer - H815dw or Dell Smart
Multifunction Printer - S2815dn Tool Box .
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select Panel Language from the list at the left side of the page.
The Panel Language page appears.
4 Select the desired language from Panel Language , and then click Apply New Settings .
Setting the Power Saver Timer Option
You can set the power saver timer for the printer. The printer enters the power saver mode when the printer is not used for a certain period of time.
NOTE: If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable , you need to enter the four-digit password to enter the Admin
Settings menu.
To set the power saver timer:
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings .
3 Tap System Settings .
4 Tap General .
5 Tap Power Saver Timer .
6 Tap Sleep or Deep Sleep .
7 Tap – or +, or use the number pad to enter the desired value.
You can specify from 1 to 60 minutes for Sleep or 1 to 60 minutes for Deep Sleep .
8 Tap OK .
About the Concurrent Jobs Feature
This feature enables you to start a concurrent job while a fax job is running. This is done by temporarily displaying the Home screen and switching to a different function that can be run concurrently such as copy or scan.
1 While the printer is sending or receiving a fax, press the ( Home ) button.
2 Tap Copy or Scan .
3 After setting the copy or scan settings, tap OK .
For details about Copy or Scan , see "Copying" or "Scanning."
116 Operator Panel
14
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Overview
NOTE: This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network using an Ethernet cable or the built-in wireless network function.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.
One of the features of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is E-Mail Alert Setup, which sends e-mail to you or the key operator when the printer needs supplies or intervention.
To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all the printers in your area, use the Printer
Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . Enter the IP address of each printer on the network to display the asset tag number.
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change the printer settings and keep track of printing trends. If you are a network administrator, you can copy the printer settings to one or all printers on the network using your web browser.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 117
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool .
Follow the procedures below to configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the operator panel before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool .
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be displayed unreadable if the pages were configured by the language different from the language of your web browser.
Setting Up From Web Browser
For Internet Explorer ®
Setting Up the Display Language
1 Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.
2 Select Languages in the General tab.
3 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.
For example:
• Italian ( Italy ) [ it-IT ]
• Spanish ( Traditional Sort ) [ es-ES tradnl ]
• German ( Germany ) [ de-DE ]
• French ( France ) [ fr-FR ]
• English ( United States ) [ en-US ]
• Danish [ da-DK]
• Dutch ( Netherlands ) [ nl-NL ]
• Norwegian ( Bokmal ) [ no ]
• Swedish [ sv-SE ]
Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non-Proxy
1 Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) Settings in the Connections tab.
3 Do either of the following:
• Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server .
• Click Advanced , and then specify the IP address of the printer in the Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with field under Exceptions .
Setting Up From Operator Panel
You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when the operator panel setting is set to Enable .
Confirm the operator panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . For more information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus.
"
118 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool , enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the system settings report or display the TCP/IP settings page, which lists the IP address. For details about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP
Settings."
Overview of the Menu Items
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool consists of the following menus:
• Printer Status
• Printer Jobs
• Printer Settings
• Print Server Settings
• Copy Printer Settings
• Print Volume
• Address Book
• Printer Information
• Tray Management
• E-Mail Server Settings Overview
• Set Password
• Online Help
• Order Supplies at:
• Contact Dell Support at:
• Dell Document Hub at: *1
*1 This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to get immediate feedback on the printer supply status. When the toner cartridge is running low, click the order supplies link on the first screen to order a new toner cartridge.
Printer Jobs
Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and Completed Jobs page.
These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to change the printer settings and to view the settings in the operator panel remotely.
Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to change the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for communications.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 119
Copy Printer Settings
Use the Copy Printer Settings menu to copy the printer settings to another printer or printers on the network by typing the IP address of each printer.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.
Print Volume
Use the Print Volume menu to check the history of printing, such as paper usage or the types of jobs being printed.
Address Book
Use the Address Book menu to view or edit the e-mail address, server address, and fax number entries in the Address
Book, or to register new entries.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.
Printer Information
Use the Printer Information menu to get information on service calls, inventory reports, or the status of current memory and engine code levels.
Tray Management
Use the Tray Management menu to get information about the paper type and size for each tray.
E-Mail Server Settings Overview
Use the E-Mail Server Settings Overview menu to configure E-Mail Server settings for Scan to Email, e-mail alert and forwarding fax to email features. Job history reports, job statistics reports, and print volume reports can also be received by e-mail. To receive alerts or reports, specify your e-mail address or the e-mail address of the key operator in the E-Mail Server menu.
Set Password
Use the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that other users do not inadvertently change the printer settings that you have selected.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.
Online Help
Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support website.
Order Supplies at:
www.dell.com/supplies
Contact Dell Support at:
support.dell.com
Dell Document Hub at:
www.dell.com/dochub
120 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Page Display Format
The layout of the page is divided into three sections listed below:
• Top Frame
• Left Frame
• Right Frame
Top Frame
The top frame is located at the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated, the current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page.
The following items are displayed in the top frame.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Product Name
2 IPv4
IPv6
3 Location
4 Contact Person
5 Event Panel
6 Machine image
Displays the product name of the printer.
Displays the IP address of the printer.
Displays location of the printer. The location can be changed in the Basic Information section on the Print Server Settings page.
Displays the name of the printer administrator. The name can be changed in the Basic
Information section on the Print Server Settings page.
Displays the indicator for the condition of the printer.
Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status menu appears in the right frame when you click the image.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 121
Left Frame
The left frame is located on the left side of all the pages. The menu titles displayed in the left frame are linked to corresponding menus and pages. You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.
The following menus are displayed in the left frame.
3
4
5
6
1
2
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 Printer Status
2 Printer Jobs
3 Printer Settings
4 Print Server Settings
5 Copy Printer Settings
6 Print Volume
7 Address Book
Links to the Printer Status menu.
Links to the Printer Jobs menu.
Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.
Links to the Print Server Reports menu.
Links to the Copy Printer Settings menu.
Links to the Print Volume menu.
Links to the E-Mail Address menu.
8 Printer Information
9 Tray Management
10 E-Mail Server Settings
Overview
Links to the
Links to the
Links to the
Printer Status menu.
Tray Management menu.
Print Server Settings menu.
11 Set Password
12 Online Help
13 Order Supplies at:
14 Contact Dell Support at:
15 Dell Document Hub at: *1
*1
Links to the Security menu.
Links to the Dell Support website.
Links to the Dell web page.
Links to the Dell Support website.
Links to the Dell Document Hub website.
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.
Right Frame
The right frame is located on the right side of all the pages. The contents of the right frame correspond to the menu that you select in the left frame. For details on the items displayed in the right frame, see "Details of the Menu
Items."
122 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Buttons in the Right Frame
1 2 3
1 Refresh Button
2 Apply New Settings
Button
Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information in the right frame.
Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to the printer. The new settings replace the old settings of the printer.
3 Restore Settings Button Restores the old settings that existed before any changes were made. New settings will not be submitted to the printer.
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . When you access these menus, the authentication window appears on the screen. Type a user name and password for the printer administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.
The default user name is admin , and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can change only the password in the Set Password page in the Security menu. The user name cannot be changed. See "Set Password" for more information.
Details of the Menu Items
"Printer Status" "Printer Status"
"Printer Jobs" "Printer Jobs"
"Printer Status"
"Printer Events"
"Printer Information"
"Job List"
"Completed Jobs"
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 123
"Printer Settings" "Printer Settings Report"
"Printer Settings"
"Printer Maintenance"
"Menu Settings"
"Reports"
"System Settings"
"Network Settings"
"USB Settings"
"PCL Settings"
"PS Settings"
"PDF Settings"
"Secure Settings"
"Copy Defaults"
"Copy Settings"
"Fax Defaults"
"Fax Settings"
"Scan Defaults"
"Direct Print Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults"
"MIFARE Customized Card" *1
"Paper Density"
"Adjust Transfer Unit"
"Adjust Fusing Unit"
"Adjust Density"
"Chart"
"Clean Developer"
"Clean Transfer Unit"
"Reset Defaults"
"Initialize PrintMeter"
"Storage" *2
"Non-Dell Toner"
"Adjust Altitude"
"Decrease Electrostatic Memory"
"Decrease Ghosting"
"Clock Settings"
"Web Link Customization"
124 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
"Print Server Settings" "Print Server Reports"
"Print Server Settings"
"Security"
"Copy Printer Settings" "Copy Printer Settings"
"Print Volume" "Print Volume"
"Address Book" "E-Mail Address"
"Tray Management"
"Server Address"
"Phone Book"
"Tray Management"
"Print Server Setup Page"
"E-Mail Server Setup Page"
"Basic Information"
"Port Settings"
"TCP/IP"
"SMB"
"E-Mail Server"
"Bonjour (mDNS)"
"SNMP"
"Scan to Network Folder"
"SNTP"
"AirPrint"
"Google Cloud Print"
"Dell Document Hub" *1
"Proxy Server"
"Wi-Fi" *1, *3
"Wi-Fi Direct" *1, *3
"Reset Print Server"
"Set Password"
"Authentication System"
"Kerberos Server"
"LDAP Server"
"LDAP Authentication"
"LDAP User Mapping"
"SSL/TLS"
"IPsec"
"802.1x" *4
"IP Filter (IPv4)"
"SMTP Domain Filtering"
"Copy Printer Settings"
"Copy Printer Settings Report"
"Print Volume"
"Dell AccessControl"
"E-Mail Address"
"E-Mail Group"
"Default Setup"
"Server Address"
"FAX Speed Dial"
"FAX Group"
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 125
*1
*2
*3
*4
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.
This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and specifications of the printer.
The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.
Printer Status
Purpose:
To check the status of the consumables, trays, and covers.
Values:
Toner Cartridge
Consumables
Paper Trays
Output Tray
Cover
Printer Type
Printing Speed
Status
Status
Capacity
Size
Status
Capacity
Status
OK Indicates that there is enough amount of toner for use.
Replace Soon Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced soon.
Replace Now
OK
Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced now.
Indicates that the status of the drum cartridge is OK for use.
Replace Soon Indicates that the drum cartridge needs to be replaced soon.
Replace Now Indicates that the drum cartridge needs to be replaced now.
OK Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is unknown.
Add Paper
OK
Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Displays the size of paper in the tray.
Indicates that the tray is available.
Closed
Open
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Indicates that the cover is closed.
Indicates that the cover is open.
Displays the type of the printer. Laser is displayed normally.
Displays the printing speed.
126 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Printer Events
Purpose:
To check the details of all alerts or indications of faults displayed in the Printer Events page when any faults such as
Out of Paper or Cover is Open occur.
Values:
Location
Details
Displays the location where a fault occurred.
Displays the details of the fault.
Printer Information
Purpose:
To verify the printer details such as the hardware configuration and software version. This page can also be displayed by clicking Printer Information in the left frame.
Values:
Dell Service Tag Number
Express Service Code
Asset Tag Number
Printer Serial Number
Memory Capacity
Processor Speed
Printer Revision Levels Firmware Version
Displays Dell service tag number.
Displays Dell express service code.
Displays the asset tag number of the printer.
Displays the serial number of the printer.
Displays the memory capacity.
Displays the processing speed.
Displays the revision date (revision level).
Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages. These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.
Job List
Purpose:
To confirm the jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.
Values:
ID
Job Name
Owner
Host Name
Job Status
Job Type
Host I/F
Job Submitted Time
Displays the job ID.
Displays the file name of the job being processed.
Displays the name of the job owner.
Displays the name of the host computer.
Displays the status of the job being processed.
Displays the type of the job.
Displays the status of the host interface.
Displays the date when the job was submitted.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 127
Completed Jobs
Purpose:
To check the completed jobs. Up to the last 20 jobs are displayed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.
Values:
ID
Job Name
Owner
Host Name
Output Result
Job Type
Impression Number
No. of Sheets
Host I/F
Job Submitted Time
Displays the job ID.
Displays the file name of the completed job.
Displays the name of the job owner.
Displays the name of the host computer.
Displays the status of the completed job.
Displays the type of the job.
Displays the total number of pages for the job.
Displays the total number of sheets for the job.
Displays the status of the host interface.
Displays the date when the job was submitted.
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report , Printer Settings , and Printer Maintenance tabs and to configure the printer settings.
The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame.
Printer Settings Report
The Printer Settings Report tab includes the Menu Settings and Reports pages.
Menu Settings
Use the Menu Settings page to display the current settings of the printer menus.
Reports
Purpose:
To print various types of reports and lists.
Values:
System Settings
Panel Settings
PCL Fonts List
PCL Macros List
PS Fonts List
PDF Fonts List
Job History
Error History
Print Meter
Demo Page
Protocol Monitor
Click Start to print the System Settings report.
Click Start to print the Panel Settings report.
Click Start to print the PCL (Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) Fonts List.
Click Start to print the PCL Macro List.
Click Start to print the PS Fonts List.
Click Start to print the PDF Fonts List.
Click Start to print the Job History report.
Click Start to print the Error History report.
Click Start to print the Print Meter report.
Click Start to print the Demo Page.
Click Start to print the Protocol Monitor report.
128 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Speed Dial
Address Book
Server Address
Click Start to print the Speed Dial report.
Click Start to print the Address Book list.
Click Start to print the Server Address list.
Fax Activity
Fax Pending
Stored Documents *1
*1
Click
Click
Click
Start
Start
Start to print the Fax Activity report.
to print the Fax Pending list.
to print the Stored Documents list.
This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings tab includes System Settings , Network Settings , USB Settings , PCL Settings , PS Settings ,
PDF Settings , Secure Settings , Copy Defaults , Copy Settings , Fax Defaults , Fax Settings, Scan Defaults , Direct
Print Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults *1 , and MIFARE Customized Card pages.
*1
Direct Print on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw; USB Direct Print on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn
System Settings
Purpose:
To configure the basic printer settings.
Values:
Power Saver Time - Sleep
Power Saver Time - Deep Sleep mm / inch
Screen Brightness
Control Panel Tone
Invalid Key Tone
Machine Ready Tone
Copy Completed Tone
Job Completed Tone
Fault Tone
Alert Tone
Out of Paper Tone
Low Toner Alert Tone
Auto Clear Alert Tone
Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job.
Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has entered Sleep mode.
Sets the measurement unit to be used on the touch panel as either mm or inches.
Sets the brightness level of the touch panel screen.
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct, or disables the tone.
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect, or disables the tone.
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready, or disables the tone.
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is complete, or disables the tone.
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than a copy job is complete, or disables the tone.
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally, or disables the tone.
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs, or disables the tone.
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper, or disables the tone.
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low, or disables the tone.
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear, or disables the tone.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 129
NFC Authentication Tone
All Tones
Low Toner Alert Message
OffHook Wake Up
Auto Log Print
RAM Disk
Panel Language
Max E-mail Size
Auto Reset
Fault Time-out
Default Paper Size
Print ID
Print Text
Banner Sheet Insert Position
Banner Sheet Specify Tray
Substitute Tray
Letterhead 2 Sided
A4<>Letter Switch
A5<>Statement Switch
Report 2 Sided Print
Use Another Tray
Envelope Mode Mismatch
Tap To Print
*1
*1
*1 Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication, or disables the tone.
Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.
Alerts you if the toner is low.
Sets whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.
Sets if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.
Sets whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure Print, Proof
Print, Private Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print features.
Used to set the language on the touch panel.
Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent. The available range is from 50 to 16384 (KB) (Default: 2048).
Sets the amount of time before the printer automatically resets its settings to the defaults when no additional settings are made.
Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally.
Sets the default print paper size.
Sets where to print the user ID on the output paper.
Sets whether the printer outputs PDL data (which is not supported by the printer) as text when the printer receives it.
Sets where to insert a banner sheet in the output.
Sets from which tray a banner sheet is fed.
Sets whether to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.
Sets whether to print on both sides of letterhead.
Sets whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter size job on A4 size paper).
Sets whether to print A5 size jobs on Statement size paper if A5 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa (Statement size job on A5 size paper).
Sets whether to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper.
Sets whether to show a message to select another tray when the specified paper is not available in the paper tray.
Sets whether to display the alert window when the print job is started without setting to the envelope mode.
Sets whether to add the printer to a mobile device such as a tablet or a notebook computer by tapping the device to of the printer.
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.
Network Settings
Purpose:
To Specify the PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol for this printer.
Values:
PS Data Format Sets PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol.
130 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
USB Settings
Purpose:
To change USB settings on your printer.
Values:
USB Port
PS Data Format
Job Time-out
PCL Settings
Purpose:
To change the PCL settings.
Values:
Enables the USB interface on your printer.
Sets PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol.
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.
Paper Tray
Paper Size
Custom Paper Size - Y
Custom Paper Size - X
Orientation
2 Sided Print
Font
Symbol Set
Font Size
Font Pitch
Form Line
Quantity
Image Enhance
Hex Dump
Draft Mode
Line Termination
Ignore Form Feed
A4 Wide
Barcode Mode
Sets the paper input tray.
Sets the paper size.
Sets the length of custom size paper. The available range is from 127 mm (5.0 inch) to 355 mm (14.0 inch).
Sets the width of custom size paper. The available range is from 77 mm (3.0 inch) to 215 mm (8.5 inch).
Sets how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Sets duplexing as the default for all print jobs.
Sets the font from the list of registered fonts.
Sets a symbol set for the specified font.
Sets the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Sets the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.
Sets the number of lines in a page.
Sets the number of copies to print.
Sets whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
Sets whether to help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.
Sets whether to print in the draft mode.
Sets how to handle line terminations.
Sets whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed control codes.
Sets whether to expand the printable area width.
Sets whether to enable the barcode mode, which is suitable for barcode printing.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 131
PS Settings
Purpose:
To change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript 3 Compatible emulation printer language.
Values:
PS Error Report
PS Job Time-out
Paper Select Mode
PDF Settings
Purpose:
To change the PDF settings.
Values:
Sets whether the contents of the errors concerning PostScript 3 Compatible page description language are printed.
Sets the execution time for one PostScript 3 Compatible job.
Sets the way to select the tray for the PostScript 3 Compatible mode.
Quantity
2 Sided Print
Print Mode
PDF Password
Re-enter PDF Password
Collation
Output Size
Layout
Detect Job Separator
Sets the number of copies.
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Sets a print mode.
Sets a password.
Confirms the set password.
Sets whether to sort the output.
Sets the output paper size.
Sets the output layout.
Sets whether to detect the end of the job in printing PDF files successively from the
USB memory.
132 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Secure Settings
Panel Lock
Purpose:
To set a limited access to Admin Settings with a password, and to set or change the password.
Values:
Panel Lock Control *1
New Password
Enables/Disables password protection for the Admin Settings.
Sets a password that is required to access the Admin Settings.
Re-enter Password
*1
Confirms the set password.
Some setting items in the Secure Settings are displayed only when this setting item is enabled.
NOTE: You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.
Functions Control
Purpose:
To specify whether to lock the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions with a password, and to set or change the password.
Values:
Copy
Scan to E-mail
Fax
Fax Driver
Sets whether to lock the Copy function with a password.
Sets whether to lock the Scan to Email function with a password.
Sets whether to lock the Fax function with a password.
Sets whether to enable or disable the Fax Driver function.
Scan to Network Folder Sets whether to lock the Scan to Network Folder function with a password.
Scan to PC Sets whether to lock the Scan to PC function with a password.
PC Scan
Scan to USB
Sets whether to lock the PC Scan function with a password.
Sets whether to lock the Scan to USB function with a password.
USB Direct Print
ID Copy
USB Services - Show
When Inserted
New Password
Re-enter Password
Sets whether to lock the USB Direct Print function with a password.
Sets whether to enable or disable the ID Copy function.
Sets whether to show a USB Drive Detected screen when a USB memory is inserted into the printer.
Sets a password that is required to access the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.
Confirms the set password.
NOTE: You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.
Secure Receive
Purpose:
Allows you to password protect all the incoming faxes. When the Secure Receive feature is enabled, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.
Values:
Secure Receive Set
New Password
Re-enter Password
Enables/Disables password protection for all incoming faxes.
Sets a password for incoming faxes.
Confirms the set password.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 133
NOTE: You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.
Desktop Login
NOTE: This Desktop Login feature is available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only.
Purpose:
Select the user authentication method from either local authentication or remote authentication. To use the remote authentication method, the LDAP server or the Kerberos server is required to authenticate the user.
Values:
Desktop Authentication Sets the authentication method.
Local Authentication* Use the local authentication method.
Remote Authentication Use the remote authentication method.
Authentication System Click to display the Authentication System page and to specify the authentication system settings.
Edit E-mail From Fields
Purpose:
To set whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use the Scan to Email function.
Reconfirm Recipients
Purpose:
To set whether to reconfirm before sending fax or scan jobs.
Software Download
Purpose:
To set whether to enable download of firmware updates.
Display of Network Information
Purpose:
To set whether to show network information in the message field of the Home screen.
Login Error
Purpose:
To specify how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock , Functions Control , and Secure
Receive .
NFC Authentication
NOTE: NFC Authentication feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Purpose:
To set whether to enable the authentication using the NFC authentication card.
Set Available Time - Copy/Scan/Fax/Print
Purpose:
To specify the time to enable the secure setting for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.
Values:
Set Available Time
Start Time
End Time
Allows you to set the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.
Sets the start time of the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.
Sets the end time of the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.
134 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Recurrence Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.
Secure Job Expiration
NOTE: Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Purpose:
To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Values:
Expiration Mode
Expiration Time
Recurrence
Weekly Settings
Monthly Settings
Allows you to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Sets the period to repeat the setting.
Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.
Sets the day of the month to repeat the setting.
Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Copy settings.
Values:
Select Tray
Collation
Reduce/Enlarge
Sets the default input tray.
Sets whether to sort a copy job.
Sets the default reduction/enlargement ratio.
Custom Reduce/Enlarge Sets the custom reduction/enlargement ratio.
Original Size
Original Type
Darken/Lighten
Sharpness
Auto Exposure
Sets the paper size of the original.
Sets the type of the original.
Sets the default copy density.
Sets the default sharpness level.
Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Auto Exposure Level Sets the background suppression level.
Copy Settings
Purpose:
To configure the Copy settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:
2 Sided Copying
Binding of Original
2-Up
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Sets the binding position for the 2-sided copying.
Off * Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto
Manual
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the size specified for
Reduce/Enlarge .
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 135
Margin Top/Bottom
Margin Left/Right
Margin Middle
Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:
Resolution
2 Sided Scanning
Binding of Original
Darken/Lighten
Delayed Send
Standard
Fine
* Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution.
Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
Photo
Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.
Sets the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.
Sets the default density to fax your documents lighter or darker.
Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.
Fax Settings
Purpose:
To configure the Fax settings.
NOTE: You cannot set up the items on the Fax Settings page unless you set up the country code under Country.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:
Fax Number
Country
Fax Header Name
Line Type
Line Monitor
DRPD Pattern
Allows you to enter the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes.
Sets the country where the printer is used.
Allows you to enter a name that will be printed on the header of faxes.
Sets the default line type; PSTN or PBX.
Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
Sets the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting from Pattern1 to Pattern7 .
DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies.
136 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Receive Mode Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing a remote receive code, or by tapping Receive in On Hook and then tapping Receive . For details about
Manual Receive , see "Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode."
Automatically receives faxes.
Fax *
Telephone/Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Receive Tel/Fax , and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
Ans Machine/Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the telephone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not supported.
Ring Tone Volume
DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company.
After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax .
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after answering an incoming call. Auto Receive Fax
Auto Receive Tel/Fax
Auto Receive
Answer/Fax
Junk Fax Setup
2 Sided Printing
Remote Receive
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.
Sets whether to reject unwanted faxes by accepting only the faxes from the numbers registered in the
Phone Book
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
Remote Receive Tone Sets a 2-digit remote receive code when Remote Receive is On .
Discard Size Sets whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page.
Received Fax Forward Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Forwarding Number Allows you to enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.
Forwarding E-mail
Address 1
Forwarding E-mail
Address 2
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.
Forwarding E-mail
Address 3
Forwarding E-mail
Address 4
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.
Forwarding E-mail
Address 5
Server Type
Server Address
Server Port Number
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.
Sets the server type.
Sets the server address registered under the server ID.
Sets the server port number.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 137
Login Name
Login Password
Re-enter Password
Share Name
Server Path
Redial Attempts
Interval of Redial
Resend Delay
Tone/Pulse
Prefix Dial
Prefix Dial Number
Fax Cover Page
Fax Header
ECM
*1
Modem Speed
Display Manual Fax
Recipients
Fax Activity
Fax Transmit
Fax Broadcast
Fax Protocol
*1
Sets the login name.
Sets the login password.
Enter the password again to confirm it.
Sets the shared name.
Sets the server path.
Sets the number of redial attempts (0 – 13) to make if the destination fax number is busy. If you enter
0, the printer will not redial.
Sets the interval (1 – 15 minutes) between redial attempts.
Sets the interval (3 – 255 seconds) between re-send attempts.
Sets whether to use tone or pulse dialing.
Sets whether to set a prefix dial number.
Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started.
It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Sets whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.
Sets whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.
Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
Sets whether to show the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax.
Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.
Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.
Sets whether to print the protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.
This item is not available when Country is set to United States.
Scan Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Scan settings.
Values:
File Format
Output Color
Resolution
Original Size
2 Sided Scanning
Binding of Original
Darken/Lighten
Sharpness
Contrast
Auto Exposure
Sets the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved.
Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Sets the default scan resolution.
Sets the paper size of the original.
Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.
Sets the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.
Sets the default scan density.
Sets the default sharpness level.
Sets the default contrast level.
Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
138 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Auto Exposure Level
Margin Top/Bottom
Margin Left/Right
Margin Middle
TIFF File Format
Image Compression
File Naming Mode
Prefix/Suffix String
Create Folder
Sets the default background suppression level.
Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm (0.0
inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.
Sets the image compression level.
Sets the detailed settings of File Naming Mode to Auto , Add Prefix or Add Suffix .
Sets the texts that are added when Add Prefix or Add Suffix are selected.
Sets whether to create a folder when saving scanned documents.
Direct Print Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults
NOTE: Direct Print Defaults feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw; USB Direct Print Defaults feature is available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn.
Purpose:
To create your own Direct Print Defaults / USB Direct Print Defaults setting.
Values:
Select Tray
2 Sided Printing
Layout
Image Types
Sets the default input tray.
Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Sets the default paper layout when Layout is selected.
Sets the print image quality when printing documents.
Collation
PDF Password
Sets whether to sort the output.
Sets a password.
Re-enter PDF Password Confirms the set password.
MIFARE Customized Card
NOTE: MIFARE Customized Card feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Purpose:
To register SSFC formatted NFC ID cards.
Values:
User ID Block 1
User ID Block 2
User ID Block 3
Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.
Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.
Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.
Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab includes the Paper Density , Adjust Transfer Unit , Adjust Fusing Unit , Adjust
Density , Chart , Clean Developer , Clean Transfer Unit , Reset Defaults , Initialize PrintMeter, Storage, Non-Dell
Toner , Adjust Altitude , Decrease Electrostatic Memory , Decrease Ghosting , Clock Settings , and Web Link
Customization pages.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 139
Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Values:
Plain Sets the density of plain paper to Light or Normal .
Adjust Transfer Unit
Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer unit. To lower the voltage, set negative values.
To increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output quality on all paper types. If you see mottles on the printed paper, try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the printed paper, try to decrease the voltage.
CAUTION: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for plain paper within the range of -5 to 10.
Plain Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for thick plain paper within the range of -5 to
10.
Covers (106-163 g/m 2 ) Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for cover paper within the range of -5 to 10.
Covers Thick
(164-216 g/m 2 )
Rough Surface
Label
Envelope
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for thick cover paper within the range of -5 to
10.
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for rough surface paper within the range of -5 to
10.
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for labels within the range of -5 to 10.
Japanese Postcard
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for envelopes within the range of -5 to 10.
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer unit for Japanese postcards within the range of -5 to
10.
Adjust Fusing Unit
Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To lower the temperature, set negative values. To increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain
Plain Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Covers (106-163 g/m 2 ) Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Covers Thick
(164-216 g/m 2 )
Rough Surface
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for rough surface paper within the range of -3 to 3.
140 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Label
Envelope
Japanese Postcard
Adjust Density
Purpose:
To adjust the density level.
Values:
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for labels within the range of -3 to 3.
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.
Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for Japanese postcards within the range of -3 to 3.
Darker3
Darker2
Darker1
Normal
Lighter1
Lighter2
Lighter3
Adjusts the density level darker than the normal setting.
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Adjusts the density level lighter than the normal setting.
Chart
Purpose:
To print various charts that can be used for diagnosis of the printer.
Values:
Pitch Chart
Full Page Solid
Alignment Chart Print
Clean Developer
Purpose:
To stir the developer in the drum cartridge.
Values:
Prints a full halftone page. Also prints a page to check the pitch. A total of two pages are printed.
Prints a chart of the full page solid.
1-Sided Prints a chart on one side of the paper.
2-Sided Prints a chart of the full page solid on both sides of the paper.
Prints a chart to check for proper alignment of the print image on the paper.
Clean Developer
Toner Refresh
Start
Start
Stirs the developer in the drum cartridge.
Expels the toner in the drum cartridge, and supplies the fresh toner from the toner cartridge.
Clean Transfer Unit
Purpose:
To clean the transfer unit.
Values:
Clean Transfer Unit Start Cleans the transfer unit.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 141
Reset Defaults
Purpose:
To initialize the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu parameters are reset to their default values.
Values:
Reset Defaults Reset Defaults User Fax Section and restart printer.
Reset Defaults User Scan Section and restart printer.
Reset Defaults User Account
Section and restart printer.* 1
Click Start to reset the fax number entries in the Address
Book.
Click Start to reset the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.
Click Start to reset the user account entries.
Reset Defaults User App Section and restart printer* 1
Reset Defaults System Section and restart printer.
Click
Click
Start
Start
to reset the user application entries.
to reset the system parameters.
Power On Wizard
*1
Power On Wizard Click
This item is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Start to perform the initial setup for the printer.
Initialize PrintMeter
Purpose:
To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to 0.
Storage
NOTE: Storage feature is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Purpose:
To clear all files stored in the RAM disk.
Values:
Clear Storage* 1 All Clear Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private Mail Box
Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.
Secure Document Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private Mail Box
Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.
Stored Document Click Start to clear all files stored in the RAM disk.
*1
This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
WARNING: Using a non-Dell toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
142 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
Decrease Electrostatic Memory
Purpose:
To widen the print gap not to leave toner streak on the next page.
NOTE: When Decrease Electrostatic Memory is set to On, the print speed will be slowed.
Decrease Ghosting
Purpose:
To reduce negative ghost.
Clock Settings
Purpose:
To specify the clock settings.
Values:
Date Format
Time Format
Time Zone
Set Date
Set Time
Sets the date format; YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, or DD/MM/YYYY.
Sets the time format; 24 Hour Clock or 12 Hour Clock.
Sets the time zone.
Sets the current date.
Sets the current time.
Web Link Customization
Purpose:
To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Values:
Select Reorder URL
Regular
Premier
Sets a URL to be linked to Order Supplies at:
Displays the regular URL ( http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna ) that can be linked to Order Supplies at: .
Displays the premier URL ( http://premier.dell.com
) that can be linked to Order Supplies at: .
Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for communication.
The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame.
Print Server Reports
The Print Server Reports tab includes the Print Server Setup Page and the E-Mail Server Setup Page .
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 143
Print Server Setup Page
Displays the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) and printing ports.
E-Mail Server Setup Page
Displays the current settings of the e-mail server.
Print Server Settings
The Print Server Settings tab includes the Basic Information , Port Settings , TCP/IP , SMB , E-Mail Server , Bonjour
(mDNS) , SNMP , Scan to Network Folder, SNTP , AirPrint , Google Cloud Print , Dell Document Hub
Server , Wi-Fi *1 , Wi-Fi Direct *1 , and Reset Print Server pages.
*1 , Proxy
*1
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.
Basic Information
Purpose:
To configure basic information of the printer.
Values:
System Settings Printer Name
Location
Contact Person
Sets the name of the printer.
Sets the location of the printer.
Sets the contact name, number, and other information of the printer administrator and service center.
Sets the contact address of the printer administrator and service center.
Administrator E-Mail
Address
Asset Tag Number
Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool
Settings
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh Interval
Enters the asset tag number for the printer.
Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages.
Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status display pages automatically from 15 to 600 seconds.
NOTE: The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame, Printer Status page, Job List page, and Completed
Jobs page.
144 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Port Settings
Purpose:
To enable or disable printing ports and management protocol features.
Values:
Ethernet
*1
*2
*1
Port Status
Ethernet Settings Auto
10Base-T Half-Duplex
Detects the Ethernet transmission rate and the duplex settings automatically.
Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex as the default value.
10Base-T Full-Duplex Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex as the default value.
100Base-TX Half-Duplex Selects 100Base-TX Half-Duplex as the default value.
100Base-TX Full-Duplex Selects 100Base-TX Full-Duplex as the default value.
Current Ethernet Settings
MAC Address
Energy Efficient Ethernet
1000Base-T Full-Duplex Selects 1000Base-T Full-Duplex as the default value.
Displays the current settings of the Ethernet.
Displays the MAC address of the printer.
Sets whether to enable the Energy Efficient
Ethernet feature.
LPD
Port9100
Sets whether to enable LPD.
Sets whether to enable Port9100.
IPP
WSD Print
WSD Scan
Network TWAIN
Sets whether to enable IPP.
Sets whether to enable Web Services on Devices (WSD) Print.
Sets whether to enable Scan to Web Services on Devices (WSD).
Sets whether to enable Network TWAIN
FTP
SMB
Bonjour (mDNS)
E-Mail Alert
Google Cloud Print
Print from Dell
Document Hub *2
Scan to Dell Document
Hub *2
Sets whether to enable FTP.
Sets whether to enable SMB.
Sets whether to enable Bonjour (mDNS).
Sets whether to enable E-Mail Alert.
Telnet
SNMP
Sets whether to enable Telnet.
Sets whether to enable SNMP.
Update Address Book Sets whether to enable Update Address Book.
SNTP Sets whether to enable SNTP.
Sets whether to enable Google Cloud Print.
Sets whether to enable Print from Dell Document Hub.
Sets whether to enable Scan to Dell Document Hub.
This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.
NOTE: The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is rebooted. When you change or configure the settings, click the Apply New Settings button to apply the new settings.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 145
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.
Values:
TCP/IP
Settings
DNS
IP Mode
Host Name
IPv4
IPv6
Sets the IP mode.
Sets the host name.
IP Address Mode
Manual IP Address
Manual Subnet Mask When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.
255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
Manual Gateway
Address
When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to
255.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
Enable Stateless
Address
Select the check box to enable the stateless address.
Use Manual Address
Get IP Address from
DHCP
Manual Address
Sets the method for acquiring the IP address.
When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.
Select the check box to set the IP address manually.
Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the IP address via DHCP.
Sets the IP address. To specify an IPv6 address, enter the address followed by a slash (/) and then "64". For details, consult your system administrator.
Sets the gateway address.
DNS Domain Name Sets the DNS domain name.
IPv4 Get DNS Server
Address from DHCP
Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the
DNS server address via DHCP.
Manual DNS Server
Address
Manually sets the DNS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when Get DNS Server Address from DHCP is not selected.
IPv6
Manual Gateway
Address
Get DNS Server
Address from DHCPv6lite
Select the check box to get the DNS server address automatically from the DHCPv6-lite server.
Manual DNS Server
Address
Sets the DNS server address.
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.
DNS Dynamic
Update (IPv4)
DNS Dynamic
Update (IPv6)
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.
146 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
WINS
LPD
Port9100
IPP
WSD
Network
TWAIN
FTP
Auto Generate
Search List
Search Domain
Name
Select the check box to automatically generate the search list.
Sets the search domain name. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can be used. If you need to specify more than one domain name, separate them using a comma or semicolon.
Time-out
Priority to IPv6 DNS
Name Resolution
WINS Mode
Sets the time-out period between 1 and 60 seconds.
Select the check box to enable the DNS Name Resolution feature.
Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the primary and secondary
WINS server addresses via DHCP.
WINS Primary Server Manually sets the primary WINS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS
Mode is not selected.
WINS Secondary
Server
Connection Time-
Out
Manually sets the secondary (backup) WINS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS Mode is not selected.
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 3,600 seconds.
IP Filter (IPv4)
Port Number
Click IP Filter (IPv4) to set the IP Filter settings on the IP Filter (IPv4) page.
Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.
Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 3,600 seconds.
Connection Time-
Out
IP Filter (IPv4)
Printer URI
Connection Time-
Out
Port Number
Click IP Filter (IPv4) to set the IP filter settings on the IP Filter (IPv4) page.
Displays the printer URI.
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.
Displays the port number for receiving requests from the client.
Maximum Sessions Displays the maximum number of connections received simultaneously by the client.
Port Number Sets the port number to 80 or from 8000 to 9999.
Sets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65,535 seconds.
Receive
Time-Out
Notification Time-
Out
Sets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.
Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.
Maximum Number of TTL
Maximum Number of Notification
Connection Time-
Out
Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20.
Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 65,535 seconds.
Password
Re-enter Password
Connection Time-
Out
Sets the password for FTP.
Enter the password again to confirm it.
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 147
HTTP
Telnet
Update
Address Book
Port Number
Simultaneous
Connections
CSRF Protection
Connection Time-
Out
Password
Re-enter Password
Connection Time-
Out
Connection Time-
Out
Sets the port number to 80 or from 8000 to 9999.
Displays the maximum number of simultaneous connections.
Select the check box to enable the CSRF Protection.
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255 seconds.
Sets the password for Telnet.
Confirms the set password.
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 65,535 seconds.
SMB
Purpose:
To specify the setting of the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.
Values:
Host Name
Workgroup
Maximum Sessions
Unicode Support
Auto Master Mode
Encrypt Password
Job Time-Out
Connection Time-Out
Sets the host name of the server computer.
Sets the workgroup.
Sets the maximum number of sessions.
Sets whether to notify the host name and workgroup name in Unicode characters during
SMB transmission.
Sets whether to enable the Auto Master Mode.
Sets whether to encrypt the password.
Sets the job time-out period between 60 and 3,600 seconds.
Sets the connection time-out period between 60 and 3,600 seconds.
E-Mail Server
Purpose:
To configure detailed settings of E-Mail Server, E-Mail Alert and E-Mail Report. This page can also be displayed by clicking E-Mail Server Settings Overview in the left frame.
Values:
E-Mail Server Settings Primary SMTP Gateway Sets the primary SMTP gateway.
SMTP Port Number Sets the SMTP port number. This must be between 1 and 65535.
E-Mail Send
Authentication
Sets the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
SMTP Login User Sets the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.
SMTP Login Password Sets the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter SMTP Login
Password
Confirms the set SMTP account password.
148 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
POP3 Server Address
POP3 Port Number
POP User Name *1
*1
*1 Sets the POP3 server address in IP address format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters.
Sets the POP3 server port number. This must be between 1 and 65535.
Sets the POP3 account user name. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.
Sets the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Confirms the set password.
POP User Password *1
Re-enter POP User
Password *1
Reply Address
SMTP Server
Connection
E-Mail Alert Settings E-Mail List 1
Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each E-mail Alert.
Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.
*1
Select Alerts for List 1
E-Mail List 2
Select Alerts for List 2
E-Mail Report Settings History Report
Statistics Report
Volume Report
Supplies Alerts
Paper Handling Alerts
Service Call
Supplies Alerts
Paper Handling Alerts
Service Call
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-
Mail Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for consumables.
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for paper handling.
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for Service Calls.
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-
Mail Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for consumables.
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for paper handling.
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for Service Calls.
Sets whether to receive the job history report by e-mail after every 20 print, copy, scan, and fax jobs.
Sets whether to receive the statistic report by e-mail on the use of print, copy, scan, and fax.
Sets whether to receive the print volume report by e-mail.
Sets what time the reports are sent.
Sets at what recurrence the reports are sent.
Sets the day of the week the reports are sent.
Transmission Time
Recurrence
Weekly Settings (for
Weekly only)
Monthly Settings (for
Monthly only)
Destination E-Mail
Address 1
Destination E-Mail
Address 2
Sets the day of the month the reports are sent.
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which the reports are sent to.
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which the reports are sent to.
This item is available only when POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP (APOP) for E-Mail Send Authentication is selected.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 149
Bonjour (mDNS)
Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings of Bonjour.
Values:
Host Name
Printer Name
Wide-Area Bonjour
Sets the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-" (dash).
Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol sets.
Select the check box to enable the Wide-Area Bonjour protocol.
SNMP
Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.
Values:
SNMP Configuration Enable SNMP v1/v2c
Protocol
Edit SNMP v1/v2c
Properties
Enable SNMP v3
Protocol
Edit SNMP v3
Properties
Select the check box to enable the SNMP v1/v2c protocol.
Click to display the SNMP v1/v2c page and to edit the setting of SNMP v1/v2c protocol from the page.
Select the check box to enable the SNMP v3 protocol.
Click to display the SNMP v3 page and to edit the setting of SNMP v3 protocol from the page.
You can click this item only when SSL communication is enabled.
SNMP v1/v2c
Purpose:
To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v1/v2c protocol.
To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v1/v2c Properties in the SNMP page.
Values:
Community Name Community Name
(Read only) *1
Re-enter Community
Name (Read only) *1
Community Name
(Read/Write) *1
Sets the community name to access (read only) data using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The default Read Community is public.
Enters the community name to access (read only) data again to confirm it.
Re-enter Community
Name (Read/Write)
Community Name
(Trap) *1
Name (Trap) *1
*1
Re-enter Community
Sets the community name to access (read and write) data using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The default Read/Write Community is private.
Enters the community name to access (read and write) data again to confirm it.
Sets the community name used for trap up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The default Trap Community is " " (NULL).
Enters the community name used for trap again to confirm it.
150 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Trap Notification 1-4
*1
*2
Trap Address Type
Trap Address
Port Number
Notify
Network *2
Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence. In this case, specify the IP address and IP socket in the following format:
IPv4
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each section of "nnn" is a variable value between 0 and 255. Note that values 127 and 224-254 are not valid for the first three-digits only. IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65535.
IPv6
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmmmm format. Each section of "xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff. IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65535.
Authenticate Error Trap Select the check box to notify Authenticate Error Trap.
The default value can be changed by using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
This item is available only when Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable.
SNMP v3
Purpose:
To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v3 protocol.
To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v3 Properties in the SNMP page.
Values:
Administrator Account Account Enabled Select the check box to enable the administrator account.
User Name
Authentication
Password
Enters the user name of the administrator account.
Sets the authentication password of the administrator account using 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter Authentication
Password
Confirms the set password.
Privacy Password Sets the privacy password of the administrator account using 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Confirms the set password.
Print Drivers / Remote
Client Account
Re-enter Privacy
Password
Account Enabled
Reset to default
Password
Select the check box to enable the print drivers and remote client account.
Click to reset the password for the print drivers and remote client account to default.
Scan to Network Folder
Purpose:
To specify the client when scanning data.
Values:
FTP Client
SMB Client
Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.
FTP Passive Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.
Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.
SMB Protocol Sets the SMB protocol.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 151
SNTP
Purpose:
To configure the SNTP server settings in order to perform time synchronization through SNTP.
Values:
SNTP IP Address / Host Name Sets the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.
Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 120 seconds.
Time Synchronization
Interval
Sets the interval for performing time synchronization using SNTP.
Last Connection Time Displays the last date and time when your printer was connected to the
SNTP server.
Connection Status Displays the status of the connections between the SNTP server and your printer.
AirPrint
Purpose:
To configure the detailed setting of AirPrint.
Values:
AirPrint
Bonjour
IPP Authentication
SSL/TLS
Supply Levels
Enable AirPrint
Name
Location
Geo-Location
Basic Authentication
User Name
Password
Re-enter Password
SSL/TLS
Toner Cartridge
Google Cloud Print
Purpose:
To register the printer to Google Cloud Print.
Values:
Select the check box to enable the printer for AirPrint.
Enter the name that is to be displayed as an AirPrint printer.
Enter the location of the printer.
Enter the physical location of the printer.
Select the check box to enable the basic authentication scheme.
Enter the user name.
Enter the user password.
Re-enter the user password for confirmation.
Click Settings to display the SSL/TLS page.
Displays the toner level.
Google Cloud Print *1 (Registration state)
Register This Device to
Google Cloud Print
Cancel Registration
Displays the Google Cloud Print registration state.
Click to register the printer to Google Cloud Print.
Click to cancel to register the printer to Google Cloud Print.
*1
Google Cloud Print can only be used when the machine is using IPv4.
152 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Dell Document Hub
NOTE: Dell Document Hub feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Purpose:
To configure the connections to the Dell Document Hub Server.
Values:
Dell Document Hub Connection Time-Out Sets the time duration until the connection becomes time-out.
Polling Interval Sets the interval time for polling.
Proxy Server
Purpose:
To configure the Proxy Server settings.
Values:
Proxy Server Use Proxy Server
Address to Bypass Proxy
Server
Server Name
Sets whether to enable the use of a proxy server.
Sets the address to bypass proxy server.
Port Number
Authentication
Login Name
Password
Re-enter Password
Sets the name of the proxy server.
Sets the port number from 1 to 65535.
Sets whether to enable authentication.
Sets the login name for the proxy server.
Sets the login password for the proxy server.
Confirms the set password.
Wi-Fi
NOTE: Wi-Fi feature is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw, when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
Purpose:
To configure the detailed setting for the wireless network.
To use the printer through wireless connection, be sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable.
NOTE: Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.
Values:
Wi-Fi Settings
Security Settings
Wi-Fi
SSID
Network Type
MAC Address
Link Channel
Link Quality
Encryption
Sets whether to enable the wireless network connections.
Sets the name that identifies the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Sets the network type from either Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure .
Displays the MAC address of the printer.
Displays the channel number of the wireless connection for the printer.
Displays the quality of the wireless network connection for the printer.
Select the encryption type from the list.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 153
WEP
WPA-PSK
WPA-Enterprise *4
Encryption
WEP Key 1
Re-enter WEP Key 1
WEP Key 2
Re-enter WEP Key 2
WEP Key 3
No Security
WEP
WPA-PSK AES/WPA2-PSK
AES *1, 2
Sets No Security to configure the wireless settings without specifying an encryption type from WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA-
Enterprise.
Sets the WEP to use through the wireless network.
Sets the WPA-PSK AES/WPA2-PSK AES to use through the wireless network.
WPA-Enterprise
AES/WPA2-Enterprise
AES *2, 3
Mixed Mode PSK *1, 2
Sets the WPA-Enterprise AES/WPA2-
Enterprise AES to use through the wireless network.
Mixed Mode
Enterprise *2, 3
Sets the Mixed Mode PSK to use through the wireless network. Mixed Mode PSK automatically selects the encryption type from either WPA-PSK TKIP, WPA-PSK AES, or WPA2-PSK AES.
Sets the Mixed Mode Enterprise to use through the wireless network. Mixed Mode
Enterprise automatically selects the encryption type from either WPA-Enterprise
TKIP, WPA-Enterprise AES, or WPA2-
Enterprise AES.
Select the WEP key code from either Hex or Ascii .
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption .
Enters the WEP key 1 again to confirm it.
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption .
Enters the WEP key 2 again to confirm it.
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption .
Re-enter WEP Key 3
WEP Key 4
Enters the WEP key 3 again to confirm it.
Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption .
Re-enter WEP Key 4
Transmit Key *5
Passphrase/Key
Enters the WEP key 4 again to confirm it.
Sets the transmit key type from the list.
Sets the passphrase.
Re-enter Passphrase/Key Enters the passphrase again to confirm it.
EAP-Identity Sets the EAP-Identity for the authentication.
Authentication Method Shows the authentication method.
Login Name
Password
Re-enter Password
Sets the login name for the authentication.
Sets the password.
Enters the password again to confirm it.
154 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
For encryption, AES or TKIP method is used.
This item is available only when Infrastructure is selected for Network Type.
For authentication and encryption by digital certificate, AES or TKIP method is used.
To activate the setting, import a certificate which supports wireless LAN (server/client) on the SSL/TLS pages, and enable the relevant certificate in advance.
When Auto is selected for Transmit Key, the key set specified for WEP Key 1 is used.
Wi-Fi Direct
NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Purpose:
To configure the detailed setting of the Wi-Fi Direct connection.
Values:
Wi-Fi Direct
Group Owner
Status
Wi-Fi Direct
Group Role
Device Name
WPS Setup
SSID (Character string following "DIRECT-
**")
Passphrase
Sets whether to enable the Wi-Fi Direct connection.
Sets the group role of the printer.
Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network with up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Confirm it when selecting the printer name on your Wi-Fi mobile device.
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.
Specifies a name to identify the Wi-Fi Direct network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered. "DIRECT-**" cannot be changed.
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Paired Device
Current Role
Current SSID
Displays the passphrase. Confirm it when entering the passphrase into your
Wi-Fi mobile device.
Displays the IP address of the Wi-Fi Direct.
Displays the subnet mask.
Displays the mobile name currently connected.
Displays the current group role of the printer.
Displays the current SSID. Confirm it selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network name on your Wi-Fi mobile device.
Reset Print Server
Purpose:
To initialize NVRAM (non-volatile RAM) for the network feature and reboot the printer. You can also initialize
NVRAM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.
Values:
Initialize NIC NVRAM Memory and restart printer.
Restart Printer
Click Start to initialize NVRAM, revert network settings to the factory default settings, and reboot the network capability.
Click Start to reboot the printer.
Security
The Security tab includes Set Password , Authentication System , Kerberos Server , LDAP Server, LDAP
Authentication , LDAP User Mapping , SSL/TLS , IPsec , 802.1x
, IP Filter (IPv4) , and SMTP Domain Filtering .
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 155
Set Password
Purpose:
To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer from the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool . This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the left frame.
NOTE: To restore the password to the default (NULL), initialize the non-volatile memory (NVM).
NOTE: You can set the password for access to Admin Settings from Panel Lock in Printer Settings.
Values:
Administrator Password
Re-enter Administrator Password
Access denial by the authentication failure of the Administrator
Sets the password using up to 128 alphanumeric characters.
Confirms the set password.
Sets how many times the failure in administrator authentication is allowed in total.
Sets the number from 5 to 255. If you set 0, this mode is disabled.
Authentication System
Purpose:
To specify the server authentication type, the server response time-out, or the search time-out.
Values:
Authentication Type Authentication System
Settings
Optional Information Server Response Time-
Out
Search Time-Out
Select the authentication system from the list.
Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for response from the server. Sets the time period from 1 to 75 seconds.
Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for searching for the server.
Sets the time period from 5 to 120 seconds.
Kerberos Server
Purpose:
To specify the settings for the Kerberos server.
Values:
Kerberos Server IP Address / Host Name
& Port
Domain Name
Sets the IP address or host name, and the port address. The port address must be 88 or between 5000 and 65535.
Enter the domain name.
156 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
LDAP Server
Purpose:
To specify the settings of the LDAP server.
Values:
Server Information
Optional Information
(for Server Address/
Phone Book)
IP Address / Host Name
& Port
Login Credentials to
Access LDAP Server
Sets IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port address must be 389, 636, 3268, 3269, or between 5000 and 65535.
LDAP Server Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.
Search Directory Root Enters the search directory root.
Select credential used to access the LDAP server.
Login Name
Password
Enters the login name.
Enters the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters.
If the password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.
Enters the login password again to confirm it.
Re-enter Password
Search
Time-Out
Search Name Order
Server Address Book
Server Phone Book
Select Wait LDAP Server Limit server. Select Wait to follow the time specified by the LDAP
to specify the time between 5 and 120 seconds.
Sets the search order.
Select the check box to enable the server address book.
Select the check box to enable the server phone book.
NOTE: Server Address Book must be set to On before you can use the server address book for the Scan to Email feature.
NOTE: Server Phone Book must be set to On before you can use the server phone book for the Fax function.
LDAP Authentication
Purpose:
To specify the LDAP server authentication method.
Values:
LDAP Authentication Authentication Method Shows the authentication method.
Use Added Text String Select whether to use the added text string from the list.
Text String Added to
User Name
Enter the added text string.
LDAP User Mapping
Purpose:
To specify the settings of the LDAP user mapping.
Values:
Common Name
Surname
Given Name
E-mail Address
Fax Phone
Sets the attribute type of the common name set for the LDAP server.
Sets the attribute type of the surname set for the LDAP server.
Sets the attribute type of the given name set for the LDAP server.
Sets the attribute type of the e-mail address set for the LDAP server.
Sets the attribute type of the fax phone number set for the LDAP server.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 157
SSL/TLS
Purpose:
To specify the settings for the SSL encryption communication to the printer, and set/delete the certificate used for
IPsec, LDAPS, or Wireless LAN.
Values:
SSL/TLS Settings
Machine Digital
Certificate
Generate Self-Signed
Certificate
Certificate Signing
Request (CSR)
HTTP-SSL/TLS
Communication *1
HTTP-SSL/TLS
Communication Port
Number
LDAP-SSL/TLS
Communication *1
SMTP-SSL/TLS
Communication
Generate Self-Signed
Certificate * 2
Select the check box to enable the HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication.
Sets the port number, which is not identical with that of HTTP. This must be 443 or between 8000 and 9999.
Select the check box to enable the LDAP, and access is established using
SSL/TLS communication.
Sets the type of SSL/TLS used to communicate with the SMTP server.
Certificate Signing
Request (CSR) *2
Upload Signed
Certificate *2
Click to display the Generate Self-Signed Certificate page and to create a security certification from the page. The Generate Self-Signed Certificate button is available only when the self-signed certificate is not generated.
Click to display the Certificate Signing Request (CSR) page and to create a certificate signing request from the page.
Click to display the Upload Signed Certificate page and to upload the certificate file to the device from the page.
Certificate
Management *2
Delete All Certificates Click to delete all the certificates.
Public Key Method Select the public key method of the self-signed certificate.
Size of Public Key
Issuer
Validity
Click to display the Certificate Management page and to manage a security certification from the page.
Select the size of public key.
Enter the issuer of SSL self-signed certificate.
Enter the valid days from 1 to 9999 days.
Click to generate the SSL self-signed certificate.
Generate Signed
Certificate
Digital Signature
Algorithm
Public Key Size
Select the digital signature algorithm.
Select the public key size.
2 Letter Country Code
(Required)
Organization Name
(Required)
Enter the 2-letter country code.
State / Province Name Enter the state or province name up to 16 bytes.
Locality Name Enter the locality name up to 32 bytes.
Enter the organization name up to 32 bytes.
Enter the organization unit up to 32 bytes.
Organization Unit
(Required)
Common Name
E-mail Address
Enter the common name.
Enter the e-mail address.
158 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Upload Signed
Certificate
Certificate
*2
Management *2
Certificate List *2
Certificate Details *2
Password
Re-enter Password
File Name
Import
Category
Certificate Order
Display the List
Category
Certificate Purpose
Issued To
Validity
Certificate Details
Enter the password to upload the certificate file.
Enter the password again for confirmation.
Click Browse to browse the file name to upload to the device.
Click Import to upload the certificate file to the device.
Select the device to certificate.
Select the order to certificate.
Click to display the Certificate List page.
Displays the device to certificate selected at the Certificate Management page.
Displays the connection to certificate selected at the Certificate
Management page.
Displays the list of certificate order.
Displays whether certificate is valid or not.
Click to display the Certificate Details page. The SSL/TLS page is displayed when no item in the Issued To column is selected.
Category
Issued To
Issuer
Serial Number
Public Key Method
Size of Public Key
Valid From
Valid Until
Status
Certificate Purpose
Certificate Selection
Status
Displays the device to certificate selected at the Certificate Management page or SSL/TLS page.
Displays the device to certificate.
Displays the issuer to certificate.
Displays the serial number of the device.
Displays the public key method.
Displays the size of public key.
Displays the time the certificate is valid.
Displays the time the certificate is invalid.
Displays whether certificate is valid or not.
Displays the purpose of certificate.
Displays the type of device certificate you selected.
E-mail Address
Use this certificate
Delete
Displayed only when an e-mail address is specified in the certificate.
Click to apply this certificate to the device.
Click to delete this certificate.
Export This Certificate Click to export the certificate to the other device.
*1
*2
This item is available only when the self-signed certificate has been generated.
This item is effective only when connected via SSL/TLS (https). Only the administrator is allowed to display the pages.
IPsec
Purpose:
To specify the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol (IPsec) for encrypted communication to the printer.
Values:
IPsec Settings Protocol
IKE
Select the check box to enable the protocol.
"Pre-Shared Key" is displayed for IKE.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 159
Pre-Shared Key Sets a shared key. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can be used.
Re-enter Pre-Shared Key Enters the shared key again to confirm it.
IKE SA Lifetime
IPsec SA Lifetime
DH Group
PFS
Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28,800 minutes.
Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2,880 minutes.
Sets the DH group.
Select the check box to enable the PFS setting.
Remote peers IPv4 address Sets the IP address to connect to.
Remote peers IPv6 address Sets the IP address to connect to.
Non IPsec communication policy
Allows communication with a device which does not support IPsec.
NOTE: If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings, you must disable it using the IPsec menu on the operator panel.
802.1x
Purpose:
To specify the settings for IEEE 802.1x authentication for encrypted communication to the printer.
Values:
Configure 802.1x
Enable IEEE 802.1x
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1x authentication.
Authentication Method EAP-MD5
EAP-MS-
CHAPv2
Selects the authentication method to use for IEEE
802.1x authentication.
PEAP/MS-
CHAPv2
Login Name: (Device
Name)
Password
Re-enter Password
Sets the login name (device name) for IEEE 802.1x authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric characters.
Sets the login password for IEEE 802.1x authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric characters.
Confirms the set login password.
IP Filter (IPv4)
Purpose:
To specify the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer.
Values:
Access List Address
Address Mask
Active Mode
Sets the IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field.
Sets the subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field.
Reject
Accept
Off
Rejects printing from specified network address.
Permits printing from specified network address.
Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address.
160 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
To configure the IP Filter feature, enter an IP address to be filtered in the Address field and the subnet mask in the
Address Mask field. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field. "*" is appended to the current value.
IP Filter Setup Procedure
You can set up to a maximum of five items and the first item set takes priority. When setting multiple filters, enter the shortest address first followed by a slightly longer address, a longer address and so on.
Enabling Printing From a Specified User
The following describes the procedure to enable printing only from the " 192.168.100.10
" IP address.
1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1 .
2 Enter " 192.168.100.10
" in the Address field and " 255.255.255.255
" in the Address Mask field.
3 Select Accept .
4 Click Apply New Settings .
Disabling Printing From a Specified User
The following describes the procedure to disable printing only from the " 192.168.100.10
" IP address.
1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1 .
2 Enter " 192.168.100.10
" in the Address field and " 255.255.255.255
" in the Address Mask field.
3 Select Reject .
4 Click the first column of the Access List row 2 .
5 Enter " 0.0.0.0
" in the Address field and " 0.0.0.0
" in the Address Mask field.
6 Select Accept .
7 Click Apply New Settings .
Enabling and Disabling Printing from Network Addresses
You can enable printing from the " 192.168
" network address and disable printing from the " 192.168.200
" network address.
The example below describes how to enable printing from the " 192.168.200.10
" IP address.
1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1 .
2 Enter " 192.168.200.10
" in the Address field and " 255.255.255.255
" in the Address Mask field.
3 Select Accept .
4 Click the first column of the Access List row 2 .
5 Enter " 192.168.200.0
" in the Address field and " 255.255.255.0
" in the Address Mask field.
6 Select Reject .
7 Click the first column of the Access List row 3 .
8 Enter " 192.168.0.0
" in the Address field and " 255.255.0.0
" in the Address Mask field.
9 Select Accept .
10 Click Apply New Settings .
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 161
SMTP Domain Filtering
Purpose:
To specify whether to restrict sending e-mails to specific domains only.
NOTE: This feature does not restrict sending e-mails through the E-Mail Alert feature.
Values:
SMTP Domain Filtering Domain Filtering
Allow Domain List
Select the check box to enable Domain Filtering.
Allows you to register up to five domains allowed for sending e-mails.
Copy Printer Settings
The Copy Printer Settings menu includes the Copy Printer Settings and Copy Printer Settings Report pages.
Copy Printer Settings
Purpose:
To copy the printer settings to one or more of the same model of the printer.
To copy the settings to another printer, specify the IP address and password of the printer to which the settings are copied in the IP Address text box and Password text box. Then, click the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list button. Copying the settings is complete. The connection time-out period is 60 seconds. After that, you can check whether the settings were copied to this page. And you need to check the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list and reboot the printer menu of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool in the destination printer to verify if the settings were actually copied or not.
If the settings can be copied but the printer configuration is different, the settings of only the same items are copied.
Printer settings are simultaneously copied to printers of up to 10 IP addresses.
NOTE: You cannot copy the Address Book when the destination printer has a fax job.
Copy Printer Settings Report
Purpose:
To verify whether the printer setting is copied to other printers successfully.
NOTE: The history is cleared by turning off the printer.
Print Volume
The Print Volume menu includes the Print Volume and Dell AccessControl pages.
Print Volume
Purpose:
To verify the number of printed pages. This page can also be displayed by clicking Print Volume in the left frame.
Values:
Printer Page Count
Paper Used
Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was shipped from the factory.
Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.
162 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Dell AccessControl
Purpose:
To specify which users have access to printing and to limit print volume per user.
Values:
AccessControl Mode
Non Registered User
AccessControl Error
Report
User Registration *1
Print User Settings
Off
On
Enables to print the data with no authentication information.
Restricts printing based on the print user information registered in the internal server.
Sets whether to permit the printing of data with no authentication information. To permit the printing for non-account user, select the check box.
Sets whether to automatically print error-related information if printing using AccessControl results in an error.
Click Edit User Registration to display the Edit Print User Registration page.
• To register a user, click Create to open the Print User Settings page.
• To delete a user, click Delete to open the Delete User page.
Clicking Back returns the screen to the status prior to deleting the user.
• To confirm or change the registered user, click Confirm / Change to open the Print User Settings page.
User Registration No.
Displays the user registration number. The Delete User button is displayed when the user is already registered.
User Name
Password
Sets the user name.
Sets the user password using 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter password
Upper Limit for
Monochrome Print
Cumulative
Monochrome Page
Count
Enter the password again to confirm it.
Sets the maximum number of pages allowed for monochrome printing.
Displays the cumulative number of pages printed for monochrome printing.
*1 This item is displayed only when AccessControl Mode is On.
Address Book
The Address Book menu includes the E-Mail Address , Server Address , and Phone Book pages.
E-Mail Address
Server Address
Phone Book
E-Mail Address
E-Mail Group
Default Setup
Server Address
FAX Speed Dial
FAX Group
Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail address entries.
Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.
Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.
Allows you to view, edit, or create server address entries.
Allows you to view, edit, or create speed dial entries.
Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 163
E-Mail Address
The E-mail Address page includes the following subpages.
E-Mail Address
E-Mail Group
Default Setup
Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail address entries.
Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.
Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.
E-Mail Address
Purpose:
To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page.
Values:
Address List to:
ID
Name
Address
Delete
Confirm / Change
Create
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user IDs indicated on the button.
Displays the user ID.
Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.
Displays the e-mail address of the user.
Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected user ID.
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user ID.
E-Mail Address (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:
To view or edit the e-mail address entries on the E-Mail Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the E-Mail Address top page.
Values:
ID
Name
Displays the selected user ID.
Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the user ID, or enter a name for the new entry.
Address
Delete *1
Apply New Settings
Restore Settings
Back
*1
Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an e-mail address for the new entry.
Click this button to delete the selected user.
Click this button to apply the new settings.
Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Click this button to return to the top page.
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
E-Mail Address (Delete)
Purpose:
To delete the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Address top page.
Values:
ID
Name
Displays the selected user ID.
Displays the name of the user registered under the selected user ID.
164 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Address
Apply New Settings
Back
Displays the e-mail address of the user.
Click this button to apply the new settings.
Click this button to return to the top page.
E-Mail Group
Purpose:
To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.
Values:
GroupID
Name
Delete
Confirm / Change
Create
Displays the group ID.
Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.
Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.
E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:
To view or edit the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the E-Mail Group top page.
Values:
E-Mail Group
E-Mail Address
*1
ID
Name
Delete *1
Address List to:
ID
Name
Address
Apply New Settings
Restore Settings
Back
Displays the selected group ID.
Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or enter a new group name.
Click this button to delete the current entry.
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button.
Displays the user ID.
Select the check box on the left to create the group.
Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.
Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an entry registered under the selected user ID, or enter an e-mail address for the new entry.
Click this button to apply the new settings.
Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Click this button to return to the top page.
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 165
E-Mail Group (Delete)
Purpose:
To delete the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Group top page.
Values:
ID
Name
Apply New Settings
Back
Displays the selected group ID.
Displays the name assigned for the group ID.
Click this button to apply the new settings.
Click this button to return to the top page.
Default Setup
Purpose:
To set the default e-mail subject and message.
Values:
Default Subject
Body Text
Apply New Settings
Restore Settings
Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject.
Allows you to enter the default e-mail message.
Click this button to apply the new settings.
Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Server Address
Server Address
Purpose:
To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.
Values:
Address List to:
ID
Name
Server Address
Delete
Confirm / Change
Create
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button.
Displays the server ID.
Displays the file directory name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.
Displays the address of the file directory.
Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected server ID.
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected server ID.
Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:
To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the Server Address top page.
Values:
ID
Name
Displays the selected server ID.
Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server ID, or enter a new server name.
166 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Server Type
Server Address
Share Name *2
Allows you to view the server type if you click Confirm / Change . Allows you to edit the server type if you click Create .
FTP *1 Select this to store scanned documents on a server via the FTP protocol.
SMB *1 Select this to store scanned documents on a computer via the Server
Message Block (SMB) protocol.
Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the server ID, or enter a new server address.
Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new shared name, when Server Type is set to SMB .
Server Path
Server Port Number
Login Name
Login Password
Re-enter Password
Delete *3
Apply New Settings
Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new path.
Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter a new port number. If you leave the text box blank, the default port number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) will be used.
Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a new login name.
Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a new password.
Confirms the set password.
Click this button to delete the current entry.
Click this button to apply the new settings.
Restore Settings
Back
*1
*2
*3
Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Click this button to return to the top page.
You can edit this item only when you click Create.
This item is available only when Server Type is set to SMB.
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
Server Address (Delete)
Purpose:
To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the Server Address top page.
Values:
ID
Name
Server Address
Apply New Settings
Back
Displays the selected server ID.
Displays the name assigned for the server ID.
Displays the server address registered under the server ID.
Click this button to apply the new settings.
Click this button to return to the top page.
Phone Book
The Phone Book page includes the following subpages.
FAX Speed Dial
FAX Group
Allows you to view, edit, or create speed dial entries.
Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 167
FAX Speed Dial
Purpose:
To view the fax number entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page.
Values:
Speed Dial List to:
Speed Dial
Name
Phone Number
Delete
Confirm / Change
Create
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial codes indicated on the button.
Displays the speed dial ID.
Displays the assigned name for a speed dial ID. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.
Displays the speed dial code.
Deletes the entry for the selected speed dial code.
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected speed dial code.
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected speed dial code.
FAX Speed Dial (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:
To view or edit the speed dial entries on the FAX Speed Dial page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the FAX Speed Dial top page.
Values:
Speed Dial
Name
Displays the selected speed dial code.
Allows you to view or edit the name of an entry registered under the speed dial code, or enter a name for the new entry.
Phone Number
Delete *1
Apply New Settings
Restore Settings
Back
Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.
Click this button to delete the entry for the speed dial code. This button is available only on the dialog box for editing an existing entry.
Click this button to apply the new settings.
Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Click this button to return to the top page.
*1 This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
FAX Speed Dial (Delete)
Purpose:
To delete the speed dial entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Speed Dial top page.
Values:
Speed Dial
Name
Phone Number
Apply New Settings
Back
Displays the selected speed dial code.
Displays the name registered under the speed dial code.
Displays the fax number registered under the speed dial code.
Click this button to apply the new settings.
Click this button to return to the top page.
168 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
FAX Group
Purpose:
To view the fax group entries registered on the FAX Group page.
Values:
ID
Name
Delete
Confirm / Change
Create
Displays a fax group ID.
Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.
Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.
FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:
To view or edit the fax number group entries on the FAX Group page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the FAX Group top page.
Values:
FAX Group
FAX Speed Dial
ID
Name
Delete *1
Speed Dial List to:
Speed Dial
Name
Phone Number
Apply New Settings
Restore Settings
Back
Displays the selected group ID.
Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or enter a new group name.
Click this button to delete the current entry.
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial codes indicated on the button.
Displays the speed dial code. Select the check box on the left to add the speed dial code in the group.
Displays the name registered for the speed dial code. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.
Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the selected speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.
Click this button to apply the new settings.
Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Click this button to return to the top page.
*1 This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
FAX Group (Delete)
Purpose:
To delete the fax number group entries registered on the FAX Group page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Group top page.
Values:
ID
Name
Apply New Settings
Back
Displays the selected group ID.
Displays the name assigned for the group ID.
Click this button to apply the new settings.
Click this button to return to the top page.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 169
Tray Management
Use the Tray Management menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Values:
MPF Mode
MPF Paper Size *1
MPF Paper Type *1
MPF Custom Paper
Size - Y *1
MPF Custom Paper
Size - X *1
MPF Display Tray
Prompt *1
Tray 1 Paper Size
Tray 1 Paper Type
Tray 1 Custom Paper
Size - Y
Tray 1 Custom Paper
Size - X
Tray 1 Display Tray
Prompt
Tray 2 Paper Size *2
Tray 2 Paper Type *2
Tray 2 Custom Paper
Size - Y *2
Tray 2 Custom Paper
Size - X *2
Tray 2 Display Tray
Prompt *2
1st Priority
2nd Priority
3rd Priority *2
Sets the MPF Mode.
Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.
Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the MPF.
Sets the size of paper loaded in tray1.
Sets the type of paper loaded in tray1.
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in tray1.
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in tray1.
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in tray1.
Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Sets the paper source to be used as the first priority.
Sets the paper source to be used as the second priority.
Sets the paper source to be used as the third priority.
*1
*2
This item is available only when Use Panel Settings is selected in MPF Mode.
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
170 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
15
Understanding the Printer Menus
When your printer is connected to a network and available to a number of users, the access to the Admin
Settings can be limited. This prevents other users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change a user default that has been set by the administrator.
However, you can use your printer driver to override user defaults and select settings for individual print jobs.
Report / List
Use the Report/List menu to print various types of reports and lists.
System Settings
Purpose:
To print a list of the current user default values, the installed options, the amount of installed print memory, and the status of printer supplies.
Panel Settings
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of all the settings of the printer menus.
PCL Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of the available PCL fonts.
PCL Macros List
Purpose:
To print the information on the downloaded PCL macro.
PS Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of the available PS fonts.
PDF Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of the available PDF fonts.
Job History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list contains the last 20 jobs.
Error History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.
Understanding the Printer Menus 171
Print Meter
Purpose:
To print the reports for the total number of pages printed.
Demo Page
Purpose:
To print a Demo page.
Protocol Monitor
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.
Speed Dial
Purpose:
To print the list of all members stored as speed dial numbers.
Address Book
Purpose:
To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.
Server Address
Purpose:
To print the list of all members stored as Server Address information.
Fax Activity
Purpose:
To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.
Fax Pending
Purpose:
To print the list of status of pending faxes.
Stored Documents
NOTE: Stored Documents feature is available only when RAM Disk under System Settings is enabled.
Purpose:
To print a list of all files stored for Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print in the
RAM disk.
172 Understanding the Printer Menus
Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap Report/List .
3 Tap until the desired report or list appears, and then select that report or list.
4 Tap Print .
The selected report or list is printed.
Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box
1 Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer - H815dw or Dell Smart
Multifunction Printer - S2815dn Tool Box .
The Tool Box opens.
2 Ensure that the Printer Setting Reports tab is open.
3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reports page appears.
4 Click the button for the desired report or list.
The report or list is printed
Wi-Fi | WPS
NOTE: The Wi-Fi|WPS menu is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Use the Wi-Fi|WPS menu to confirm or specify wireless network settings or connections.
Wi-Fi
Use the Wi-Fi menu to confirm or specify wireless network settings.
For details, see "Wi-Fi."
Wi-Fi Direct
Use the Wi-Fi Direct menu to confirm or specify Wi-Fi Direct network settings.
For details, see "Wi-Fi Direct."
WPS (Connect via PBC)
Use WPS (Connect via PBC) menu to start configurations of the Wi-Fi Direct network with WPS-PBC.
For details, see "WPS Setup."
WPS (Connect via PIN)
Use WPS (Connect via PIN) menu to start configurations of the Wi-Fi Direct network with WPS-PIN.
For details, see "WPS Setup."
Understanding the Printer Menus 173
Paired Device
NOTE: The Paired Device menu is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Use the Paired Device menu to confirm the device name in the Paired Device list, if there is any device connected to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct.
You can disconnect the paired device from this list. For details, see "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network."
Admin Settings
Use the Admin Settings menu to configure a variety of printer features.
Phone Book
Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings.
Individuals
Purpose:
To store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.
Groups
Purpose:
To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial code. Up to six group dial codes can be registered.
PCL
Use the PCL menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation printer language.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Paper Tray
Purpose:
To specify the default paper tray.
Values:
Auto *
MPF
Tray1
Tray2 *1
*1 This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Paper Size
Purpose:
To specify the default paper size.
174 Understanding the Printer Menus
Values: mm series
A4
(210x297mm) * 1
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Letter
(8.5x11")
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10
(4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env.
(3.9x7.5")
DL Env.
(110x220mm)
C5 Env.
(162x229mm)
Postcard
(100x148mm)
Custom Paper Size
*1
Denotes country-specific factory default value.
inch series
Letter
(8.5x11") * 1
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
Understanding the Printer Menus 175
A4
(210x297mm)
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10
(4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env.
(3.9x7.5")
DL Env.
(110x220mm)
C5 Env.
(162x229mm)
Postcard
(100x148mm)
Custom Paper Size
*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.
NOTE: Selecting a custom size for the paper size prompts you to enter a custom length and width.
Orientation
Purpose:
To specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Values:
Portrait *
Landscape
Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper.
Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper.
2 Sided Print
Purpose:
To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Values:
1 Sided *
2 Sided Flip on Long Edge *
Flip on Short Edge
Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.
176 Understanding the Printer Menus
Font
Purpose:
To specify the default font from the fonts registered in the printer.
Values:
CG Times
CG Times It
CG Times Bd
CG Times BdIt
Univers Md
Univers MdIt
Univers Bd
Univers BdIt
Univers MdCd
Univers MdCdIt
Univers BdCd
Univers BdCdIt
AntiqueOlv
AntiqueOlv It
AntiqueOlv Bd
CG Omega
CG Omega It
CG Omega Bd
CG Omega BdIt
GaramondAntiqua
Garamond Krsv
Garamond Hlb
GaramondKrsvHlb
Courier *
Courier It
Courier Bd
Courier BdIt
LetterGothic
LetterGothic It
LetterGothic Bd
Albertus Md
Albertus XBd
Clarendon Cd
Coronet
Marigold
Arial
Arial It
Arial Bd
Arial BdIt
Times New
Times New It
Times New Bd
Times New BdIt
Symbol
Wingdings
Line Printer
Times Roman
Times It
Times Bd
Times BdIt
Helvetica
Helvetica Ob
Helvetica Bd
Helvetica BdOb
CourierPS
CourierPS Ob
CourierPS Bd
CourierPS BdOb
SymbolPS
Palatino Roman
Palatino It
Palatino Bd
Palatino BdIt
ITCBookman Lt
ITCBookman LtIt
ITCBookmanDm
ITCBookmanDm It
HelveticaNr
HelveticaNr Ob
HelveticaNr Bd
HelveticaNr BdOb
N C Schbk Roman
N C Schbk It
N C Schbk Bd
N C Schbk BdIt
ITC A G Go Bk
ITC A G Go BkOb
ITC A G Go Dm
ITC A G Go DmOb
ZapfC MdIt
ZapfDingbats
C39 Narrow
C39 Regular
C39 Wide
OCR-A
OCR-B
Understanding the Printer Menus 177
Symbol Set
Purpose:
To specify a symbol set for a specified font.
Values:
DESKTOP
DNGBTSMS
ISO-11
ISO-15
ISO-17
ISO-21
ISO-4
ISO-6
ISO-60
ISO-69
ISO L1
ISO L2
ISO L5
ISO L6
LEGAL
MATH-8
MC TEXT
MS PUB
PC-1004
PC-775
PC-8
PC-850
PC-852
PC-8 DN
PC-8 TK
PI FONT
PS MATH
PS TEXT
ROMAN-8 *
SYMBOL
Font Size
Purpose:
To specify the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Values:
WIN 3.0
WINBALT
WINGDINGS
WIN L1
WIN L2
WIN L5
PC CYR
PC-866U
ISO CYR
WIN CYR
GREEK-8
WIN-GRK
PC-851
PC8-GRK
ISO-GRK
12.00
*
Available Range: 4.00 – 50.00
Sets the values in increments of 0.25.
Font size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.
NOTE: The Font Size menu is only displayed for typographic fonts.
Font Pitch
Purpose:
To specify the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.
Values:
10.00
*
Available Range: 6.00–24.00
Sets the value in increments of 0.01.
Font pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters in a horizontal inch of type. For non-scalable mono spaced fonts, the pitch is displayed, but cannot be changed.
NOTE: The Font Pitch menu is only displayed for fixed or mono spaced fonts.
178 Understanding the Printer Menus
Form Line
Purpose:
To set the number of lines in a page.
Values: mm series
64 *1 Sets the value in increments of 1.
Available Range: 5–128
*1
Denotes country-specific factory default values. inch series
60 *1
Available Range: 5–128
*1
Sets the value in increments of 1.
Denotes country-specific factory default values.
The printer sets the amount of space between each line (vertical line spacing) based on the Form Line and
Orientation menu items. Select the correct Orientation before changing Form Line .
See also:
"Orientation"
Quantity
Purpose:
To set the default print quantity. (Set the number of copies required for a specific job from the printer driver. Values selected from the printer driver always override values selected from the operator panel.)
Values:
1 *
Available Range: 1 – 999
Sets the value in increments of 1.
Image Enhance
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable the Image Enhance feature, which makes the boundary line between black and white smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual appearance.
Values:
Off
On *
Disables the Image Enhance feature.
Enables the Image Enhance feature.
Understanding the Printer Menus 179
Hex Dump
Purpose:
To help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.
Values:
Disable *
Enable
Disables the Hex Dump feature.
Enables the Hex Dump feature.
Draft Mode
Purpose:
To save toner by printing in the draft mode. The print quality is reduced when printing in the draft mode.
Values:
Disable *
Enable
Does not print in the draft mode.
Prints in the draft mode.
LineTermination
Purpose:
To add the line termination commands.
Values:
Off *
Add-LF
Add-CR
CR-XX
The line termination command is not added.
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF
The LF command is added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=LF, FF=FF
The CR command is added.
CR=CR, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
The CR and LF commands are added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
Ignore Form Feed
Purpose:
To specify whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed control codes.
Values:
Off *
On
Disables the Ignore Form Feed feature.
Enables the Ignore Form Feed feature.
180 Understanding the Printer Menus
A4 Wide
Purpose:
To expand the printable area width.
Values:
Off *
On
Disables A4 Wide.
Enables A4 Wide.
Barcode Mode
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable the barcode mode, which is suitable for barcode printing.
Values:
Disable *
Enable
Disables the barcode mode.
Enables the barcode mode.
NOTE: Be sure to set to Disable after using the barcode mode.
PS
Use the PS menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript 3 Compatible emulation printer language.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
PS Error Report
Purpose:
To specify whether the contents of the errors concerning PostScript 3 Compatible page description language are printed.
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Off
On *
Discards the print job without printing an error message.
Prints an error message before it discards the job.
NOTE: Instructions from the PS driver override the settings specified on the operator panel.
PS Job Time-out
Purpose:
To specify the execution time for one PostScript 3 Compatible job. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Off *
On 1 minute *
Available Range: 1-900 minutes
Job time-out does not occur.
An error concerning the PostScript 3 Compatible page description language occurs if processing is not completed after the specified time.
Understanding the Printer Menus 181
Paper Select Mode
Purpose:
To specify the way to select the tray for PostScript 3 Compatible mode. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto *
Select From Tray
The tray is selected as the same setting as in the PCL mode.
The tray is selected in a method compatible with regular PostScript 3 Compatible printers.
Use the PDF menu to change printer settings that only affect the PDF jobs.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Quantity
Purpose:
To specify the number of copies to print.
Values:
1 *
Available Range: 1 – 999
Sets the value in increments of 1.
2 Sided Print
Purpose:
To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Values:
1 Sided *
2 Sided Flip on Long Edge*
Flip on Short Edge
Print Mode
Purpose:
To specify the print mode.
Values:
Normal *
High Quality
High Speed
Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.
For documents with normal sized characters.
For documents with small characters or thin lines, or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Prints with the higher speed than the Normal mode, but the quality is less.
182 Understanding the Printer Menus
PDF Password
Purpose:
To specify the password to print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the PDF file).
Values:
Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF.
Enter PDF Password
Collation
Purpose:
To specify whether to sort the job.
Values:
Collated
Uncollated *
Sorts the job.
Does not sort the job.
Output Size
Purpose:
To specify the output paper size for PDF.
Values:
A4 *1
Letter *1
Auto
*1 The default paper size is displayed.
Layout
Purpose:
To specify the output layout.
Values:
Auto % *
100% (No Zoom)
Booklet
2 Pages Up
4 Pages Up
Detect Job Separator
Purpose:
To specify whether to detect the end of the job in printing PDF files successively.
Values:
Off
On *
Disables the Detect Job Separator feature.
Enables the Detect Job Separator feature.
Understanding the Printer Menus 183
Network
Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the wired or wireless network.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Wi-Fi
NOTE: The Wi-Fi feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Purpose:
To confirm or specify wireless network settings.
Wi-Fi
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable the Wi-Fi feature.
Values:
Off
On
Disables the Wi-Fi feature.
Enables the Wi-Fi feature.
Wi-Fi Status
Purpose:
To confirm the wireless communication status.
Values:
Status
SSID
Encryption Type
Good
Acceptable
Low
No Reception
Displays the name that identifies the wireless network.
Displays the encryption type.
Wi-Fi Setup Wizard
NOTE: Wi-Fi Setup Wizard is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
Purpose:
To configure the wireless network interface.
Values:
Select access point
Manual SSID Setup
WEP Key
Passphrase
Enter SSID
Select the access point from the list.
When you select an access point using WEP as the encryption type, enter the WEP key.
When you select an access point using WPA, WPA2, or
Mixed as the encryption type, enter the passphrase.
Specifies a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
184 Understanding the Printer Menus
Infrastructure
Ad-hoc
No Security *
Mixed mode PSK
WPA2-PSK-AES
WEP
No Security *
WEP
Select when you configure the wireless settings through the access point such as a wireless router.
Specifies No Security to configure the wireless settings without specifying an encryption type.
Select to configure the wireless settings with the encryption type of Mixed mode PSK. Mixed mode PSK automatically selects the encryption type from either WPA-PSK-TKIP,
WPA-PSK-AES, or WPA2-PSK-AES.
Passphrase Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.
Select to configure the wireless settings with the encryption type of WPA2-PSK-AES.
Passphrase Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.
(hex: 0-9, a-f, A-F, 16 to 64 characters)
Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network.
For 64bit keys, 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
For 128bit keys, 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from and WEP Key 4 .
Auto * ,
WEP Key 1 , WEP Key 2 , WEP Key 3 ,
Select to configure the wireless settings without the access point such as a wireless router.
Select to configure the wireless settings without specifying the encryption type from WEP.
Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network.
For 64bit keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For 128bit keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from
Key 1 * , WEP Key 2 , WEP Key 3 , and
WEP Key 4 .
WEP
WPS Setup
Purpose:
To configure the wireless network using WPS.
Values:
Push Button
Configuration *
PIN Code
Start Configuration
Start Configuration
Print PIN Code
Configures the wireless settings with WPS-PBC.
Configures the wireless settings using the PIN code assigned automatically by the printer.
Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when entering PIN assigned to the printer into your computer.
Understanding the Printer Menus 185
IP Mode
Purpose:
To configure the IP mode.
Values:
Dual Stack *
IPv4 Mode
IPv6 Mode
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings.
Values:
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.
Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.
Get IP Address
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
AutoIP *
BOOTP
RARP
DHCP
Panel
Sets the IP address automatically. The printer will first try to get the IP address from the DHCP server. If the printer cannot get the IP address, then the printer uses the link local address. A random value in the range of
169.254.0.0 to 169.254.255.255 that is not currently in use on the network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.
Sets the IP address using BOOTP.
Sets the IP address using RARP.
Sets the IP address using DHCP.
Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the operator panel.
When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.
When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.
255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
IPsec
NOTE: IPsec feature is available only when IPsec is enabled on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Purpose:
Disables IPsec.
186 Understanding the Printer Menus
Reset Wi-Fi
Purpose:
To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wireless network settings are reset to their default values.
Wi-Fi Direct
NOTE: The Wi-Fi Direct feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Purpose:
To configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.
Values:
Wi-Fi Direct
Group Role
Device Name
Paired Device
SSID
Passphrase
WPS Setup
Disable
Enable
*
Auto
Group Owner *
Disconnect All
Disconnect now
Disconnect and Reset
Passphrase
Disables the Wi-Fi Direct network.
Enables the Wi-Fi Direct network.
Automatically resolves the group role for Wi-Fi Direct.
Sets the printer as the Group Owner when using Wi-Fi Direct. Setting the printer to become the group owner makes it possible for devices to discover this printer. The SSID of the printer will be then displayed in the list of wireless networks on your Wi-Fi mobile device.
Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network with up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Confirm it when selecting the printer name on your Wi-Fi certified device.
Displays the status of the Wi-Fi Direct connections between the printer and up to 3 Wi-Fi mobile devices.
Disconnects all the Wi-Fi Direct connections.
Disconnects all the Wi-Fi Direct connections right now.
Disconnects the Wi-Fi Direct connections and resets the passphrase.
Print Passphrase
Reset Passphrase
Push Button
Configuration
PIN Code
*
Displays the name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network. You can also specify the name with up to 32 alphanumeric characters ("DIRECT-XY" cannot be changed). Confirm it when selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network name on the Wi-Fi mobile devices.
Displays the passphrase. Confirm it when entering the passphrase into the
Wi-Fi mobile devices.
Prints the passphrase. Confirm it when entering the passphrase into the
Wi-Fi mobile devices.
Resets the passphrase.
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network with WPS-PBC.
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using PIN code assigned automatically by the printer.
Print PIN Code Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when entering PIN assigned to the printer into your Wi-Fi mobile device.
Reset Code Resets the PIN code.
Understanding the Printer Menus 187
Ethernet
NOTE: When the Ethernet cable is connected, Ethernet is displayed.
Purpose:
To confirm or specify wired network settings.
IP Mode
Purpose:
To configure the IP mode.
Values:
Dual Stack *
IPv4 Mode
IPv6 Mode
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings.
Values:
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.
Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.
Get IP Address
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
AutoIP *
BOOTP
RARP
DHCP
Panel
Sets the IP address automatically. The printer will first try to get the IP address from the DHCP server. If the printer cannot get the IP address, then the printer uses the link local address. A random value in the range of
169.254.0.0 to 169.254.255.255 that is not currently in use on the network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.
Sets the IP address using BOOTP.
Sets the IP address using RARP.
Sets the IP address using DHCP.
Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the operator panel.
When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.
When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.
255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
IPsec
NOTE: IPsec feature is available only when IPsec is enabled on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Purpose:
Disables IPsec.
188 Understanding the Printer Menus
Connection Speed
NOTE: Connection Speed feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wired network.
Purpose:
To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto *
10BASE-T Half
10BASE-T Full
100BASE-TX Half
100BASE-TX Full
1000BASE-T Full
Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.
Uses 10BASE-T Half-duplex.
Uses 10BASE-T Full-duplex.
Uses 100BASE-TX Half-duplex.
Uses 100BASE-TX Full-duplex.
Uses 1000BASE-T Full-duplex.
Protocols
Purpose:
To enable or disable each protocol. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
LPD
Port9100
FTP
IPP
SMB TCP/IP
WSD Print
WSD Scan
Network TWAIN
SNMP UDP
E-mail Alert
Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.
Enables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.
Disables the Port9100 port.
Enables the Port9100 port.
Disables FTP port.
Enables FTP port.
Disables IPP port.
Enables IPP port.
Disables SMB TCP/IP port.
Enables SMB TCP/IP port.
Disables Web Services on Devices (WSD) print.
Enables Web Services on Devices (WSD) print.
Disables Web Services on Devices (WSD) scan.
Enables Web Services on Devices (WSD) scan.
Disables Network TWAIN.
Enables Network TWAIN.
Disables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) UDP port.
Enables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) UDP port.
Disables the E-mail Alert feature.
Enables the E-mail Alert feature.
Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.
Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.
Understanding the Printer Menus 189
Bonjour(mDNS)
Telnet
Update Address Book
HTTP-SSL/TLS
Google Cloud Print
Print from Dell Document
Hub *1
Scan to Dell Document
Hub *1
Enable
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable
Enable *
Disable *
*1
Disables Bonjour (mDNS).
Enables Bonjour (mDNS).
Disables Telnet.
Enables Telnet.
Disables Update Address Book.
Enables Update Address Book.
Disables HTTP-SSL/TLS.
Enables HTTP-SSL/TLS.
Disables Google Cloud Print.
Enables Google Cloud Print.
Disables Print from Dell Document Hub .
Enables Print from Dell Document Hub .
Disables Scan to Dell Document Hub .
Enables Scan to Dell Document Hub
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.
.
Advanced Settings
Purpose:
To specify advanced network settings.
IP Filter
NOTE: IP Filter feature is available only for
LPD
or
Port9100
.
Purpose:
To block data received from certain IP addresses through the wired or wireless network. You can set up to five IP addresses. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values: n (n is 1-5) IP Address
Subnet Mask
Mode Off *
Accept
Reject
Sets the IP address for Filter n.
Sets the address mask for Filter n.
Disables the IP Filter feature for Filter n.
Accepts an access from the specified IP address.
Rejects an access from the specified IP address.
IEEE 802.1x
NOTE: IEEE 802.1x feature is available only when the printer is connected using Ethernet cable and it is available only when the
IEEE 802.1x authentication is enabled.
Purpose:
To disable IEEE 802.1x authentication. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
190 Understanding the Printer Menus
PS Data Format
Purpose:
To specify PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol, you can configure the PS Data Format settings.
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto *
Standard
BCP
TBCP
Binary
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol.
Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch between them according to the specified control code.
Used when no special processing is required for data.
Reset LAN
Purpose:
To initialize wired network data stored in non-volatile memory (NVM). After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wired network settings are reset to their default values.
Delete All Certificates
Purpose:
To delete all certificates of the printer. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all certificates are deleted.
Fax Settings
Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Fax Line Settings
Purpose:
To configure basic settings for the fax line.
Fax Number
Purpose:
To set the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of a fax message.
NOTE: Ensure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup .
Understanding the Printer Menus 191
Country
Purpose:
To select the country where the printer is used.
Values:
Australia
Austria
Belgium
Canada
Colombia
Denmark
France
Germany
Ireland
Italy
Luxembourg
Malaysia
Mexico
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
Singapore
South Africa
Fax Header Name
Purpose:
To set the sender name to be printed on the header on faxes.
Line Type
Purpose:
To select the default line type.
Values:
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Thailand
United Kingdom
United States
Unknown
PSTN *
PBX
Uses PSTN.
Uses PBX.
Line Monitor
Purpose:
To set the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
Values:
Off
Low
Medium *
High
Turns off the volume of the line monitor.
Sets the volume of the line monitor to Low.
Sets the volume of the line monitor to Medium.
Sets the volume of the line monitor to High.
192 Understanding the Printer Menus
DRPD Pattern
Purpose:
To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
Values:
Pattern1–7 DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD Patterns are specified by your telephone company. The patterns provided with your printer are shown below:
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Pattern 4 *
Pattern 5
Pattern 6
Pattern 7
Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service. For example, Pattern
7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400 ms, stops for 800 ms, rings for 400 ms and stops for 1400 ms. This pattern is repeated over and over again. This printer only responds to Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.
Incoming Defaults
Purpose:
To configure settings for incoming fax.
Receive Mode
Purpose:
To select the default fax receiving mode.
Understanding the Printer Menus 193
Values:
Telephone
Fax *
Telephone / Fax
Ans Machine/Fax
DRPD
Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code, or by tapping
Manually in the Telephone Mode."
Manual Receive in On
Hook and then tapping Receive . For details about Manual Receive , see "Receiving a Fax
Automatically receives faxes.
When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in
Auto Receive Tel/Fax , and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not supported.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Ring Tone Volume
Purpose:
To set the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax .
Values:
Off
Low
Medium
High *
Turns off the volume of the ring tone.
Sets the volume of the ring tone to Low.
Sets the volume of the ring tone to Medium.
Sets the volume of the ring tone to High.
Auto Receive Setup
Purpose:
To configure settings for automatic fax reception.
Values:
Auto Receive Fax
Auto Receive Tel/Fax
Auto Receive Ans/Fax
0 second * Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call. The value is set in increments of 1 second.
Available Range: 0-255 seconds
6 seconds * Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call. The value is set in increments of 1 second.
Available Range: 0-255 seconds
21 seconds * Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call. The value is set in increments of 1 second.
Available Range: 0-255 seconds
194 Understanding the Printer Menus
Junk Fax Setup
Purpose:
To reject unwanted faxes by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
Secure Receive
NOTE: Secure Receive feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable .
Purpose:
To specify whether to require a password to receive faxes, and to set or change the password.
Values:
Secure Receive Set Disable *
Enable
Does not require a password to receive faxes.
Requires a password to receive faxes.
Change Password *1
*1
0000 – 9999 Sets or changes the password required to receive faxes.
This item is available only when Secure Receive Set is set to Enable .
Received Fax Forward
NOTE: Forward to Email feature is available only when E-Mail Server information and Forwarding E-mail
Address are registered. For information on e-mail server settings, see "E-Mail Server" and on forwarding e-mail address information, see "Fax Settings."
Purpose:
To set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Values:
Off *
Forward
Print and Forward
Forward to Email
Forwarding Number
Forwarding Number
Does not forward incoming faxes.
Forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination. Prints incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified destination.
Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Forwards incoming faxes to specified e-mail addresses. Prints incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to specified e-mail addresses.
Print and Forward to
Forward to Server
Print and Forward to
Server
Forwards incoming faxes to a specified server address. Prints incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified server address.
NOTE: Depending on the e-mail server settings, the printer may not print incoming faxes when forwarding the incoming faxes to e-mail addresses is not successful.
Understanding the Printer Menus 195
2 Sided Print
To set the duplex printing for fax.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not perform duplex printing.
Performs duplex printing.
Remote Receive
Purpose:
To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.
Values:
Off *
On
Remote Receive Tone
Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
Specifies the tone in two digits to start Remote Receive.
Discard Size
Purpose:
To set the printer to discard images or any text at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit the output paper.
Values:
Off *
On
Auto Reduction
Prints excess images or text at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.
Discards any excess images or text.
Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the appropriate paper size.
Transmission Defaults
Purpose:
To configure settings for transmitting fax.
Auto Redial Setup
Purpose:
To configure settings for automatic redial.
Values:
Redial Attempts 3 * Sets the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not redial. The value is set in increments of 1.
Interval of Redial
Available Range: 0-13
1 minute * Sets the interval between redial attempts. The value is set in increments of 1 minute.
Available Range: 1-15 minutes
196 Understanding the Printer Menus
Resend Delay 8 seconds *
Available Range: 3-255 seconds
Sets the interval between re-send attempts. The value is set in increments of 1 second.
Tone / Pulse
Purpose:
To select the dialing type.
Values:
Tone *
Pulse(10PPS)
Pulse(20PPS)
Uses tone dialing.
Sets "DP (10PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 10 Pulse Per Second) as the dial type.
Sets "DP (20PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 20 Pulse Per Second) as the dial type.
Prefix Dial
Purpose:
To select whether to set a prefix dial number.
Values:
Off *
On
Prefix Dial Number
Does not set a prefix dial number.
Sets a prefix dial number.
Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic
Branch Exchange (PABX).
Fax Cover Page
Purpose:
To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not attach a cover page to faxes.
Attaches a cover page to faxes.
Fax Header
Purpose:
To print the information of the sender on the header of the faxes.
Values:
Off
On *
Does not print the sender
Prints the sender
' s information on the header of faxes.
' s information on the header of faxes.
NOTE: If United States is selected for the setting of Country , this option does not appear on the menu. The setting is fixed to On and cannot be changed. For information on the country setting, see "Setting Your Country."
Understanding the Printer Menus 197
ECM
Purpose:
To set whether to enable or disable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.
Values:
Off
On *
Disables the ECM.
Enables the ECM.
Modem Speed
Purpose:
To adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
Values:
2.4 Kbps
4.8 Kbps
9.6 Kbps
14.4 Kbps
33.6 Kbps *
Display Manual Fax Recipients
Purpose:
To set whether to display the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax.
Values:
Off
On *
Does not display the fax number when manually sending a fax.
Displays the fax number when manually sending a fax.
Fax Reports
Purpose:
To configure settings for fax reports.
Fax Activity
Purpose:
To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Values:
Auto Print *
No Auto Print
Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Does not automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
198 Understanding the Printer Menus
Fax Transmit
Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.
Values:
Print Always
Print On Error *
Print Disable
Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.
Fax Broadcast
Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.
Values:
Print Always *
Print On Error
Print Disable
Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.
Fax Protocol
Purpose:
To set whether to print the protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the cause of a communication problem.
Values:
Print Always
Print On Error
Print Disable *
Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.
Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.
Does not print the protocol monitor report.
System Settings
Use System Settings to configure the power saving mode, warning tones, time-out duration, display language, and job log auto print settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
General
Purpose:
To configure general settings for the printer.
Power Saver Timer
Purpose:
To specify the time for transition to power saver mode.
Values:
Sleep 7 minutes *
Available Range: 1–60 minutes
Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job.
Understanding the Printer Menus 199
Deep Sleep 8 minutes *
Available Range: 1–60 minutes
Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has entered Sleep mode.
When you specify 1 minute for Sleep , the printer enters power saver mode 1 minute after it finishes a job. This uses much less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Specify 1 minute if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time.
Select a value between 1 and 60 minutes for the power saver mode if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives data from the computer or remote fax machine. You can also change the status of the printer to the standby mode by pressing the
( Power Saver ) button on the operator panel.
Date & Time
Purpose:
To specify the date and time formats.
Values:
Time Zone
Date
Time
Format
Format 12 Hour
24 Hour
Sets the time zone.
Sets the date depending on the Format settings.
Sets the date format.
Sets the time.
Sets the time in 12-hour format.
Sets the time in 24-hour format.
mm / inch
Purpose:
To specify the default measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.
Values:
Millimeters(mm) *
Inches(")
Selects millimeter as the default measurement unit.
Selects inch as the default measurement unit.
NOTE: The default for mm/inch varies depending on other settings, such as Country and Document Size .
Screen Brightness
Purpose:
To adjust the screen brightness of the touch panel.
Values:
5 *
Available Range: 1-10
Sets the brightness in ten levels, with ten being the brightest.
200 Understanding the Printer Menus
Audio Tone
Purpose:
To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message appears.
Values:
Control Panel
Invalid Key
Machine Ready
Copy Completed
Job Completed
Fault Tone
Alert Tone
Out of Paper
Low Toner Alert
Off
Soft
Normal *
Loud
Off
Soft
Normal *
Loud
Off
Soft
Normal *
Loud
Off
Soft
Normal *
Loud
Off
Soft
Normal *
Loud
Off
Soft
Normal *
Loud
Off
Soft
Normal *
Loud
Off *
Soft
Normal
Loud
Off *
Soft
Normal
Loud
Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.
Emits a tone when the operator panel input is correct.
Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.
Emits a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.
Does not emit a tone when the printer is ready to process a job.
Emits a tone when the printer is ready to process a job.
Does not emit a tone when a copy job is complete.
Emits a tone when a copy job is complete.
Does not emit a tone when a job other than a copy job is complete.
Emits a tone when a job other than a copy job is complete.
Does not emit a tone when a job ends abnormally.
Emits a tone when a job ends abnormally.
Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.
Emits a tone when a problem occurs.
Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
Emits a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
Does not emit a tone when the toner is low.
Emits a tone when the toner is low.
Understanding the Printer Menus 201
Auto Clear Alert Off *
Soft
Normal
Loud
Off
Does not emit a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.
Emits a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.
NFC Authentication
All Tones
*1
*1
Soft
Normal *
Loud
Off
Soft
Normal *
Loud
Does not emit a tone when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication.
Emits a tone when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication.
Disables all the alert tones.
Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once.
This item is available only on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw.
Low Toner Alert Message
Purpose:
To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.
Values:
Off
On *
Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.
Shows the alert message when the toner is low.
OffHook Wake Up
Purpose:
To specify whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.
Wakes up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.
Auto Log Print
Purpose:
To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not automatically print a job history report .
Automatically prints a job history report .
Print logs can also be printed using the Report/List menu.
202 Understanding the Printer Menus
RAM Disk
Purpose:
To allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for the Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print features. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Off
On *
Does not allocate memory to the RAM disk file system. Secure Print, Private Mail
Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print jobs will abort and be recorded to the job log.
Sets the allocation of memory to the RAM disk file system in increments of 20 MB.
260 MB
Available Range:
20-300 MB
NOTE: Restart your printer when you change the settings for the RAM Disk menu.
Fax Server Phone Book
Purpose:
To specify whether to search the phone numbers from the phone book for the LDAP server.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not search the phone numbers from the phone book for the LDAP server.
Searches the phone numbers from the phone book for the LDAP server.
NOTE: You can search the phone numbers only from the local Phone Book when Fax Server Phone Book is set to
Off .
E-mail Server Address Book
Purpose:
To specify whether to search the e-mail addresses from the address book for the LDAP server.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not search the e-mail addresses from the address book for the LDAP server.
Searches the e-mail addresses from the address book for the LDAP server.
NOTE: You can search the e-mail addresses only from the local Address Book when E-mail Server Address Book is set to Off .
Power On Wizard
Purpose:
To perform initial setup for the printer.
Understanding the Printer Menus 203
Max E-mail Size
Purpose:
To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.
Values:
4096 KB *
50-16384 KB
Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, in increments of 1 KB.
Timers
Purpose:
To configure timer settings.
Auto Reset
Purpose:
To automatically reset the settings for Copy, Scan, Fax, E-mail, or Print to the default settings and return to the standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the specified time.
Values:
45sec *
1min
2min
3min
4min
Fault Time-out
Purpose:
To specify the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally. The print job is canceled if the timeout time is exceeded.
Values:
Off
On * 60 seconds *
Available Range: 3-300 seconds
Disables the fault time-out.
Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally.
Output Settings
Purpose:
To configure settings concerning output from the printer.
204 Understanding the Printer Menus
Default Paper Size
Purpose:
To specify the default paper size.
Values: mm series
A4 (210x297mm) *1
Letter(8.5x11")
*1
Denotes country-specific factory default values.
inch series
A4 (210x297mm)
Letter(8.5x11") *1
*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.
Print ID
Purpose:
To specify a location where the user ID is printed.
Values:
Off *
Top Left
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Right
Does not print the user ID.
Prints the user ID on the top left of the page.
Prints the user ID on the top right of the page.
Prints the user ID on the bottom left of the page.
Prints the user ID on the bottom right of the page.
NOTE: When printing on DL size paper, a part of the user ID may not be printed correctly.
Print Text
Purpose:
To specify whether the printer outputs PDL (Page Description Language) data, which is not supported by the printer, as text when the printer receives it. Text data is printed on A4 or Letter size paper.
Values:
Off
On *
Does not print the received data.
Prints the received data as text data.
Understanding the Printer Menus 205
Banner Sheet
Purpose:
To specify the position of banner sheet, and also specify the tray in which the banner sheet is loaded.
Values:
Insert Position
Specify Tray
Off *
Front
Back
Front & Back
MPF
Tray1 *
Tray2 *1
Does not print the banner sheet.
Inserted before the first page of every copy.
Inserted after the last page of every copy.
Inserted before the first page of every copy and after the last page of every copy.
The banner sheet is loaded in the MPF.
The banner sheet is loaded in tray1.
The banner sheet is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
*1
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Substitute Tray
Purpose:
Specifies whether to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.
Values:
Off
Larger Size
Nearest Size *
Use MPF
No tray size substitute accepted.
Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no larger paper size, the printer substitutes paper of nearest size.
Substitutes paper of nearest size.
Substitutes paper from the MPF.
Letterhead 2 Sided
Purpose:
To specify whether to print on both sides when using letterhead.
Values:
Disable *
Enable
Does not print on both sides of letterhead.
Prints on both sides of letterhead.
A4<>Letter Switch
Purpose:
To print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 size paper is not available or to print Letter size jobs on A4 size paper if Letter size paper is not available.
Values:
Off *1
On *
Does not print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper or Letter size jobs on A4 paper.
Prints A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter size job on A4 size paper).
206 Understanding the Printer Menus
*1 Depending on the printer setting, the printer will continue to print on existing media of a different size or prompt the user to select from the following:
• Delete Job
• Supply with correct media
A5<>Statement Switch
Purpose:
To print A5 size jobs on Statement size paper if A5 size paper is not available or to print Statement size jobs on A5 size paper if Statement size paper is not available.
Values:
Off *1
On *
Does not print A5 size jobs on Statement size paper or Statement size jobs on A5 paper.
Prints A5 size jobs on Statement size paper if A5 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa
(Statement size job on A5 size paper).
*1
Depending on the printer setting, the printer will continue to print on existing media of a different size or prompt the user to select from the following:
• Delete Job
• Supply with correct media
Report 2 Sided Print
Purpose:
To specify to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper.
Values:
1 Sided *
2 Sided
Prints reports on one side of a sheet of paper.
Prints reports on both side of a sheet of paper.
Use Another Tray
Purpose:
To change to another paper tray when a paper size runs out in the specified paper tray.
NOTE: If you select another paper tray with paper size smaller than the paper size specified in the job, the parts that do not fit are not printed (print size is not adjusted automatically).
Values:
Off
On *
Does not print on other paper sizes in other paper trays if the paper size specified in the job runs out.
Shows a message to select another tray when the specified paper runs out in the paper tray.
Envelope Mode Mismatch
Purpose:
To specify whether to display the alert window when the print job is started without setting to the envelope mode.
Values:
Ignore
Show Warning *
Does not display the alert window and continues the print job on the envelope even if a mismatch is detected in the printer's envelope mode settings.
Displays the alert window to confirm whether to hold the print job and change to the envelope mode, or to continue the print job anyway without changing to the envelope mode.
Understanding the Printer Menus 207
Set Available Time
Purpose:
Sets the available time for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.
Values:
Copy, Scan, Fax, Print Set Available Time
Start Time
End Time
Recurrence
Off *
On
Does not set the time when function is available.
Sets the time when function is available.
Sets the start time of the available time.
Sets the end time of the available time.
Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.
NOTE: Set Available Time can be configured when Print , Copy , Scan , or Fax is set to On .
Secure Job Expiration
NOTE: Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On .
Purpose:
To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Values:
Expiration Mode Off *
Expiration Time
Recurrence
Weekly Setting
On
Daily
Weekly*
Monthly
Does not set the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure
Print in the RAM disk.
Sets the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the
RAM disk daily.
Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the
RAM disk weekly.
Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print monthly.
Sets the day of the week to delete the files stored as Secure Print.
Monthly Setting
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday *
1 Day *
Available Range: 1-28 days
Sets the day of the month to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
208 Understanding the Printer Menus
AccessControl Mode
Purpose:
To specify who has access to printing.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not limit access to printing.
Limits access to printing. Authentication is done using user information registered on the printer.
Non Registered User
Purpose:
To specify whether to permit the printing of data without authentication information.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not permit non-account user to print the data.
Permits non-account user to print the data.
AccessControl Error Report
Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically print error-related information if printing with AccessControl results in an error.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not print the error report when printing with AccessControl results in an error.
Prints the error report when printing with AccessControl results in an error.
NFC - Tap to Print
NOTE: The Tap to Print feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Purpose:
To specify whether to add the printer to a mobile device such as a tablet or a notebook computer by tapping the device to
of the printer.
Values:
Disable
Enable *
Does not add the printer to a mobile device by tapping the device to the printer.
Adds the printer to a mobile device by tapping the device to the printer.
Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu to fine-tune the printer for optimal print quality, reset the print meter or the life counter of the replaced parts, or reset the default settings by initializing the printer's non-volatile memory.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Understanding the Printer Menus 209
Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify paper density settings.
Values:
Plain Light (<100gsm)
Normal *
Adjust Transfer Unit
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Purpose:
To specify the transfer unit voltage adjustment for each paper type.
Values:
Plain
Plain Thick
Covers
(106-163g/m 2 )
Covers Thick
(164-216g/m 2 )
Rough Surface
Label
Envelope
Japanese Postcard
0 *
Available Range: -5 to +10
0 *
Available Range: -5 to +10
0 *
Available Range: -5 to +10
0 *
Available Range: -5 to +10
0 *
Available Range: -5 to +10
0 *
Available Range: -5 to +10
0 *
Available Range: -5 to +10
0 *
Available Range: -5 to +10
Sets the transfer unit voltage in increments of 1. The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the printed paper, try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the printed paper, try to decrease the voltage.
210 Understanding the Printer Menus
Adjust Fusing Unit
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Purpose:
To adjust the temperature setting of the fusing unit for each paper type.
Values:
Plain
Plain Thick
Covers
(106-163g/m 2 )
Covers Thick
(164-216g/m 2 )
Rough Surface
Label
Envelope
Japanese Postcard
Adjust Density
Purpose:
To adjust density level.
Values:
0 *
Available Range: -3 to +3
0 *
Available Range: -3 to +3
0 *
Available Range: -3 to +3
0 *
Available Range: -3 to +3
0 *
Available Range: -3 to +3
0 *
Available Range: -3 to +3
0 *
Available Range: -3 to +3
0 *
Available Range: -3 to +3
Sets the fusing unit temperature in increments of 1. The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
Darken
Normal *
Lighten
-3 to -1
0
+1 to +3
Adjusts the density level darker than the normal setting.
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Adjusts the density level lighter than the normal setting.
Chart
Purpose:
To print various charts that can be used for diagnosis of the printer.
Values:
Pitch Chart
Full Page Solid
1-Sided
2-Sided
Prints a full halftone page. Also prints a page to check the pitch. A total of two pages are printed.
Specifies to print a chart of the full page solid on the paper.
Specifies to print a chart of the full page solid on both sides of the paper.
Begins to print a full page solid.
Understanding the Printer Menus 211
Alignment Chart Print Prints a chart to check for proper alignment of the print image on the paper.
Clean Developer
Purpose:
To stir the developer in the drum cartridge.
Values:
Start Stirs the developer in the drum cartridge.
Clean Transfer Unit
Purpose:
To clean the transfer unit.
Values:
Start Cleans the transfer unit.
Toner Refresh
Purpose:
To clean the toner in the drum cartridge (and supply new toner from toner cartridge).
NOTE: Toner Refresh feature uses the toner, and shorten the life of the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge.
Values:
Start Cleans the toner.
Reset Defaults
Purpose:
To initialize the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu parameters are reset to their default values.
Values:
User Fax Section
User Scan Section
User Account Section
User App Section
System Section
Initialize Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book.
Initialize Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.
Initialize Initializes the user registration information.
Initialize Initializes the widget application information.
Initialize Initializes the system parameters.
Initialize Print Meter
Purpose:
To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to zero.
Reset Transfer Belt Unit
Purpose:
To initialize the life counter of the transfer belt unit. After replacing the transfer belt unit, be sure to initialize its life counter.
212 Understanding the Printer Menus
Reset Fusing Unit
Purpose:
To initialize the life counter of the fusing unit. After replacing the fusing unit, be sure to initialize its life counter.
Clear Stored Jobs
NOTE: Clear Stored Jobs feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On .
Purpose:
To clear all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail box Print, Proof Print, and Stored Print in the RAM disk.
Values:
All
Secure Document
Stored Document
Clear
Clear
Clear
Deletes all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print in the RAM disk.
Deletes all files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Deletes all files stored as Stored Print in the RAM disk.
Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
CAUTION: Using a non-Dell™ toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner, etc.
Values:
0m *
1000m
2000m
3000m
Sets the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
Understanding the Printer Menus 213
Decrease Electrostatic Memory
Purpose:
To widen the print gap not to leave toner streak on the next page.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not widen the print gap.
Widens the print gap.
NOTE: When Decrease Electrostatic Memory is set to On, the print speed will be slowed.
Decrease Ghosting
Purpose:
To reduce negative ghost.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not decrease negative ghosting.
Decreases negative ghosting.
Clear Job History
Purpose:
To clear the job history of all finished jobs.
Fax Line Test
NOTE: Fax Line Test feature is not available when the Fax function is disabled.
Purpose:
To test if the voltage supply from the fax line is sufficient.
Secure Settings
Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the menus. This prevents items from being changed accidentally.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
See also:
"Panel Lock"
Panel Lock
Purpose:
To set a limited access to Admin Settings with a password, and to set or change the password.
Values:
Panel Lock Control
Change Password *1
*1
Disable *
Enable
0000 – 9999
Disables password protection for
Enables password protection for
This item is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable .
Admin Settings .
Admin Settings .
Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Settings .
214 Understanding the Printer Menus
Functions Control
NOTE: Functions Control feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable .
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable or disable each of the printer functions, or to require a password to use the functions.
Values:
Copy On *
On (Password)
Scan to E-mail
Fax
Fax Driver
Scan To Network Folder
Scan To PC
PC Scan
Scan To USB
Off
On *
On (Password)
Off
On *
On (Password)
Off
Enable *
Disable
On *
On (Password)
Off
On *
On (Password)
Off
On *
On (Password)
Off
On *
On (Password)
Off
Enables the Copy function.
Enables the Copy function, but requires a password to use the function.
Disables the Copy function.
Enables the Scan to Email function.
Enables the Scan to Email function, but requires a password.
Disables the Scan to Email function.
Enables the Fax function.
Enables the Fax function but requires a password to send faxes (does not require a password to receive incoming faxes).
Disables the Fax function (the printer will not send or receive faxes).
Enables the Fax Driver function.
Disables the Fax Driver function (the printer will not send faxes).
Enables the Scan To Network Folder function.
Enables the Scan To Network Folder function, but requires a password.
Disables the Scan To Network Folder function.
Enables the Scan To PC and Web Services on Devices
(WSD) Scan function.
Enables the Scan To PC function, but requires a password. Web Services on Devices (WSD) Scan is disabled since On (Password) is not supported by Web Services on Devices (WSD) Scan.
Disables the Scan To PC and Web Services on
Devices (WSD) Scan function.
Enables the PC Scan function.
Enables the PC Scan function, but requires a password.
Disables the PC Scan function.
Enables the Scan To USB function.
Enables the Scan To USB function, but requires a password.
Disables the Scan To USB function.
Understanding the Printer Menus 215
USB Direct Print
ID Copy
USB Service
Change Password *1
On *
On (Password)
Off
Enable *
Disable
Show When
Inserted
Enable *
Disable
Enables the USB Direct Print function.
Enables the USB Direct Print function, but requires a password.
Disables the USB Direct Print function.
Enables the ID Copy function.
Disables the ID Copy function.
Shows a USB Drive Detected screen when a USB memory is inserted into the printer.
Does not show a USB Drive Detected screen when a
USB memory is inserted into the printer.
Changes the password that is set under the
Functions Control menu.
*1 This item is available only when On(Password) is enabled.
Desktop Authentication
NOTE: The Desktop Authentication feature is available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only.
Purpose:
To specify the Desktop Authentication method.
Values:
Local Authentication *
Remote Authentication
Use the local authentication method.
Use the remote authentication method.
Edit E-mail From Fields
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to Email.
Values:
Disable
Enable *
Disables editing of the transmission source.
Enables editing of the transmission source.
Reconfirm Recipient
Purpose:
To specify whether to reconfirm the recipient before sending a fax or scan.
NOTE: If the Reconfirm Recipient menu is set to Reconfirm Recipient , recipients can only be selected from the phone book or the address book. You cannot directly enter an address or fax number.
Values:
No Confirmation *
Reconfirm Recipient
Does not display a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually sent.
Displays a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually sent.
216 Understanding the Printer Menus
Domain Filtering
Purpose:
To specify whether to only send e-mails to specified domains.
NOTE: Set the domains from SMTP Domain Filtering on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Values:
Off *
Allow Domains
Disables Domain Filtering.
Only allows e-mails to be sent to specified domains.
Software Download
Purpose:
To enable or disable download of firmware updates.
Values:
Disable
Enable *
Disables firmware updates.
Enables firmware updates.
Display of Network Information
Purpose:
To show or hide network information in the message field of the Home screen.
Values:
Show IPv4 Address *
Show Host Name
Hide Network Information
Shows the IPv4 address of the printer on the Home screen.
Shows the host name of the printer on the Home screen.
Does not show network information on the Home screen.
Login Error
NOTE: Login Error feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable .
Purpose:
To specify the number of error entry attempts allowed when you log in as an administrator in the Admin
Settings and Report/List menu.
Values:
Off *
On 5 *
Available Range: 1-10
Does not allow an administrator to log in after one error entry attempt.
Sets the number of error entry attempts allowed when an administrator logs in.
Understanding the Printer Menus 217
NFC Authentication
NOTE: The NFC Authentication feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable the authentication using the NFC authentication card.
Values:
Disable
Enable *
Does not permit the authentication using the NFC authentication card.
Permits the authentication using the NFC authentication card.
USB Settings
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.
USB Port
NOTE: USB Port feature is available only for the USB port on the rear of the printer.
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable the USB port. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Disable
Enable *
Disables the USB interface.
Enables the USB interface.
PS Data Format
Purpose:
To specify PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol. You can configure the PS Data Format settings. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto
Standard
BCP
TBCP*
Binary
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript 3 Compatible communication protocol.
Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch between them according to the specified control code.
Used when no special processing is required for data.
Job Time-out
Purpose:
To specify the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print job is canceled if the time-out time is exceeded.
Values:
Off
On * 30 seconds *
Available Range: 5–300 seconds
Disables the job time-out.
Sets the time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.
218 Understanding the Printer Menus
Default Settings
Use Default Settings to modify the Copy , Scan , or Fax menu defaults.
Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To modify the Copy menu defaults.
Copy Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the Copy menu.
Auto Exposure Level
Purpose:
To specify the default background suppression level.
Values:
Normal *
High
Highest
Sets the background suppression level to Normal .
Sets the background suppression level to High.
Sets the background suppression level to Highest.
Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To modify the Fax menu defaults. See "Fax" for more details.
Scan Defaults
Purpose:
To modify the Scan menu defaults.
Scan Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the Scan menu.
Auto Exposure Level
Purpose:
To specify the default background suppression level.
Values:
Normal *
High
Highest
Sets the background suppression level to Normal.
Sets the background suppression level to High.
Sets the background suppression level to Highest.
TIFF File Format
Purpose:
To specify the default TIFF file format.
Values:
TIFF V6
TTN2 *
Sets the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6.
Sets the default TIFF file format to TTN2.
Understanding the Printer Menus 219
Image Compression
Purpose:
To specify the image compression level.
Values:
High
Normal *
Low
Sets the image compression level to High.
Sets the image compression level to Normal.
Sets the image compression level to Low.
Direct Print Defaults (available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only)
USB Direct Print Defaults (available on the Dell Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn only)
Purpose:
To modify the defaults for the Direct Print Defaults or USB Direct Print Defaults menu. See
"Print PDF/TIFF" for more details.
Tray Management
Use the Tray Settings menu to define the print media loaded in tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Tray Settings
To configure tray settings.
MPF
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the MPF.
Values:
Display Tray Prompt
MPF Mode Use Panel Settings *
Use Printer Driver Settings
Manual
Enter a check to display a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the MPF. The factory default is on
(check).
Uses the paper size and type specified on the operator panel.
Use the paper size and type specified on the printer driver.
When the print job is started, the printer pauses the job and shows the screen to prompt the user to load the paper of the specified size and type. To continue the job, check that the specified paper is loaded, and tap Continue in the screen on the touch panel.
220 Understanding the Printer Menus
Size *1 mm series inch series
(7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10
(4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env.
(3.9x7.5")
DL Env.
(110x220mm)
C5 Env.
(162x229mm)
Postcard
(100x148mm)
Custom
Letter
(8.5x11") *2
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
A4
(210x297mm) *2
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Letter
(8.5x11")
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
Executive
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
A4
(210x297mm)
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Understanding the Printer Menus 221
Type *1
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10
(4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env.
(3.9x7.5")
DL Env.
(110x220mm)
C5 Env.
(162x229mm)
Postcard
(100x148mm)
Custom
Plain *
Plain Thick
Covers
(106-163g/m 2 )
Covers Thick
(164-216g/m 2 )
Rough Surface
Label
Envelope
Recycled
Japanese Postcard
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color
*1 Available only when MPF Mode is set to Use Panel Settings .
*2
Denotes country-specific factory default value.
222 Understanding the Printer Menus
Tray1
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in tray1.
Values:
Display Tray Prompt
Size mm series inch series
A4
(210x297mm) *1
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Letter
(8.5x11")
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Postcard
(100x148mm)
Custom
Letter
(8.5x11") *1
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
A4
(210x297mm)
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Enter a check to display a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in tray1. The factory default is on (check).
Understanding the Printer Menus 223
Type
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Postcard
(100x148mm)
Custom
Plain
Plain Thick
Covers
(106-163g/m 2 )
Covers Thick
(164-216g/m 2 )
Rough Surface
Label
Recycled
Japanese Postcard
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color
*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.
NOTE: For more information on supported paper sizes, see "Supported Paper Sizes."
Tray2
NOTE: Tray2 feature is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Values:
Display Tray Prompt Enter a check to display a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder. The factory default is on (check).
Size mm series A4
(210x297mm) *1
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Letter
(8.5x11")
224 Understanding the Printer Menus
Type inch series
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
A4
(210x297mm)
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Custom
Plain
Plain Thick
Covers
(106-163g/m 2 )
Covers Thick
(164-216g/m 2 )
Rough Surface
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Custom
Letter
(8.5x11") *1
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Label
Recycled
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color
Understanding the Printer Menus 225
Tray Priority
Purpose:
To set the priority order of the paper trays for automatic tray selection. If paper trays loaded with the same paper size and type exists, the paper tray is selected according to this priority order.
Values:
First
Second
Third
MPF
Tray1
Tray2
*1
MPF *
Tray1
Tray2
MPF
Tray1
Tray2
*
*1
*1
Sets the MPF as the first priority.
Sets tray1 as the first priority.
Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the first priority.
Sets the MPF as the second priority.
Sets tray1 as the second priority.
Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the second priority.
Sets the MPF as the third priority.
Sets tray1 as the third priority.
Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the third priority.
*1
The factory default when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Language Settings
Use the Language Settings menu to configure Panel Language , or Keyboard Layout .
Panel Language
Purpose:
To determine the language of the text on the touch panel.
Values:
English *
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska
Keyboard Layout
Purpose:
To select the keyboard layout on the touch panel.
226 Understanding the Printer Menus
Values:
QWERTY
AZERTY
QWERTZ
Use the Print menu to select and print a job stored by the Private Mailbox, Public Mailbox, Proof Print, Secure
Print, and Secure Fax Receive features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Private Mailbox
NOTE: Private Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On .
Purpose:
To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Private Mailbox.
Values:
Select User ID
Select a Job
Select All
Quantity 1 *
Available Range: 1-999
Use Driver Settings
Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.
Selects a job to print.
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1.
Delete
Print and Delete *
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.
Prints the selected job.
Deletes the document after it is printed.
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Public Mailbox
NOTE: Public Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On .
Purpose:
To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Public Mailbox.
Values:
Select User ID Select a Job
Select All
Quantity
Delete
1 *
Available Range: 1-999
Use Driver Settings
Print and Delete
Selects a job to print.
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1.
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.
Prints the selected job.
Deletes the document after it is printed.
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Understanding the Printer Menus 227
Proof Print
NOTE: Proof Print feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On .
Purpose:
To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Proof Print. When the print job is sent from the printer driver on the computer, a single copy is printed for you to check the print result. If you do not have problems with the print result, you can choose to print more copies. This prevents a large number of misprinted copies from being printed at one time.
Values:
Select User ID Select a Job
Select All
Quantity 1 *
Available Range: 1-999
Use Driver Settings
Selects a job to print.
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1.
Delete
Print and Delete
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.
Prints the selected job.
Deletes the document after it is printed.
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Secure Print
NOTE: Secure Print feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On .
Purpose:
To print confidential jobs. The printer can hold the job in memory until you arrive at the printer and type the password on the operator panel.
Values:
Select User ID
Select a Job
Select All
Delete
Print and Delete *
Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.
Selects a job to print.
Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Prints the selected job.
Deletes the document after it is printed.
Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Secure Fax Receive
Purpose:
To print confidential faxes. The printer can hold the job in memory until you arrive at the printer and type the password on the operator panel.
Values:
Enter Password Enter the password you specified in Secure Receive .
228 Understanding the Printer Menus
Tile Settings
The Tile Settings screen appears when is tapped under the Print menu.
Use Tile Settings to create and edit custom tiles for Print.
Copy
You can configure a variety of copy features under the Copy menu.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Quantity
Purpose:
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.
Darken / Lighten
Purpose:
To make the copy darker or lighter than the original.
Values:
Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings. Darken 3
Darken 2
Darken 1
Normal *
Lighten 1
Lighten 2
Lighten 3
Select Tray
Purpose:
To specify the input tray.
Values:
MPF
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Works well with dark documents.
Paper Size mm series
The paper is fed from the MPF. When Use Printer Driver
Settings is set in MPF of Tray Settings , Any is displayed for
Size and Type . If you start the copy job with Any as the paper size and type, A4 or Letter paper in the MPF, select
is selected as the paper size and
MPF plain
and specify the paper size and type.
is selected as the paper type. If you want to specify the size and type of
A4
(210x297mm) *1
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Understanding the Printer Menus 229
inch series
(110x220mm)
C5 Env.
(162x229mm)
Postcard
(100x148mm)
Custom
Letter
(8.5x11") *1
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
A4
(210x297mm)
Letter
(8.5x11")
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10
(4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env.
(3.9x7.5")
DL Env.
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10
(4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env.
(3.9x7.5")
230 Understanding the Printer Menus
Paper Type
DL Env.
(110x220mm)
C5 Env.
(162x229mm)
Postcard
(100x148mm)
Custom
Plain
Plain Thick
Covers
(106-163g/m 2 )
Covers Thick
(164-216g/m 2 )
Rough Surface
Labels
Envelope
Recycled
Japanese Postcard
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Tray1 *1
Tray2 *2
*1
*2
Color
The paper is fed from tray1.
The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Denotes country-specific factory default value.
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
2 Sided Copying
Purpose:
To specify whether to make duplex copy and select the binding position.
Values:
1 1 Sided *
1 2 Sided
2 1 Sided
2 2 Sided
Long Edge Binding *
Short Edge Binding
Long Edge Binding *
Short Edge Binding
Long Edge Binding *
Short Edge Binding
Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.
Prints one sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.
Prints two sided originals on one side of a sheet of paper.
Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.
Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.
Prints two sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.
Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.
Understanding the Printer Menus 231
Sharpness
Purpose:
To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Values:
Sharpen
Normal *
Soften
Makes the copy sharper than the original.
Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Makes the copy softer than the original.
Reduce/Enlarge
Purpose:
To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image.
Values:
Custom ratio mm series inch series
100 *
25-400 %
100% *
50%
70%
A4 A5
81%
B5 A5
122%
A5 B5
141%
A5 A4
200%
100% *
50%
64%
Ledger Letter
78%
Legal Letter
129%
Statement Letter
154%
Statement Legal
200%
Original Size
Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Sets a custom ratio in increments of 1 percent.
232 Understanding the Printer Menus
Values: mm series inch series
*1
Auto *1
A4 (210x297mm)
A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
Statement (5.5x8.5")
Executive (7.3x10.5")
Auto *1
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
Statement (5.5x8.5")
A4 (210x297mm)
A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Executive (7.3x10.5")
Denotes country-specific factory default values.
NOTE: When Auto is selected, the printer assumes that the document size is the size of the print media loaded in tray1 or the
MPF.
Original Type
Purpose:
To improve the image quality by selecting the type of the original document.
Values:
Photo & Text *
Text
Photo
Used for documents with both text and photos.
Used for documents with text.
Used for documents with photos.
Collation
Purpose:
To sort the copy job. For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete set of three page documents is printed one by one.
Values:
Auto *
Collated
Uncollated
Automatically sorts a copy job only when you use the DADF.
Sorts a copy job.
Does not sort a copy job.
Understanding the Printer Menus 233
2-Up
Purpose:
To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Values:
Off *
Auto
Manual
Does not perform 2-up printing.
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in
Reduce/Enlarge .
Margin
Purpose:
To specify the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the copy.
Values:
Top/Bottom
Left/Right
Middle
0.2 inch * (4 mm * )
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
0.2 inch * (4 mm * )
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
0.0 inches * (0 mm * )
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).
Auto Exposure
Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Values:
Off
On *
Does not suppress the background.
Suppresses the background to enhance text.
Save Settings
The Save Settings screen appears when is tapped under the Copy menu.
Use Save Settings to save a variety of copy features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for Copy.
ID Copy
You can configure a variety of ID copy features under the ID Copy menu.
Values:
Quantity
Darken / Lighten
Select Tray
Sharpness
Auto Exposure
For details about each menu, see "Copy."
234 Understanding the Printer Menus
Save Settings
The Save Settings screen appears when is tapped under the ID Copy menu.
Use Save Settings to save a variety of ID Copy features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for ID Copy.
Scan
As a default setting, the printer provides the following scan feature tiles on the Home screen: Scan to Email, Scan to
Network Folder, Scan to USB, Scan to WSD, and Scan to PC.
Scan to Email
Purpose:
To use the e-mail to send the scanned image. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various scan options you can set for the scan.
Values:
Enter Recipient's
Address
Address Book
Sender *1
*1
Individuals
Groups
Network Address Book
Keyboard
Address Book
Network Address Book
Enters the e-mail address of the recipient using the keyboard.
Selects an e-mail address from the local address book.
Selects an e-mail group from the local address book.
Searches an e-mail address from the server address book.
Enters the e-mail address of the sender using the keyboard.
Selects an e-mail address of the sender from the local address book.
Searches an e-mail address of the sender from the server address book.
The sender's e-mail address cannot be edited when the remote authentication is used as the user authentication method on the Dell
Smart Multifunction Printer | S2815dn.
Scan to Network Folder
Purpose:
To store the scanned image on a network server or a computer. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various scan settings you can set for the scan.
Values:
Address Book Selects a FTP address or Server Message Block (SMB) protocol address from the local address book.
Scan to USB
Purpose:
To save the scanned image to a USB memory attached to the printer. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various scan settings you can set for the scan.
Values:
Folder Name Selects which folder the scanned image is saved to.
Understanding the Printer Menus 235
Scan to WSD
Purpose:
To save scanned data on a computer using Web Services on Devices (WSD).
NOTE: Scan to WSD is available when the OS of the client computer is Microsoft
Windows ® 8, and Windows ® 8.1.
® Windows Vista ® SP2 (or later), Windows ® 7,
Values:
Computer Name
Scan
ScanToPrint
ScanToEmail
ScanToFax
ScanToOCR
Selects which computer the scanned image is saved to. Up to 20 computers will be listed.
Sends the scanned image to the computer according to the chosen event. Which application each event is associated with depends on the setting on the computer.
Scan to PC
Purpose:
To save scanned data on a computer. The Scan to PC feature allows you to import scanned data from the printer to a computer connected via a USB cable. The computer must have ScanButton Manager installed to receive the data.
See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various scan settings you can set for the scan.
Scan Settings
The Scan Settings screen appears when the
USB screen.
is tapped on the
Use Scan Settings to configure a variety of scan features.
Scan to Email , Scan to Network Folder , or Scan to
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Output Color
Purpose:
To select color or black and white scanning.
Values:
Color *
Black & White
Gray Scale
Scans in color mode. Works well with texts and photos.
Scans in black and white mode. Works well with texts.
Scans in grayscale mode. Works well with texts and photos.
Resolution
Purpose:
To specify the resolution of the scanned image.
Values:
200 dpi *
300 dpi
400 dpi
236 Understanding the Printer Menus
600 dpi
File Format
Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.
Values:
PDF *
Multi-Page TIFF
TIFF (1 File per Page)
JPEG (1 File per Page)
2 Sided Scanning
Purpose:
To specify whether to scan both sides of a document.
Values:
1 Sided *
2 Sided Long Edge Binding *
Short Edge Binding
Scans one side of a document.
Scans both sides of a document bound by the long edge.
Scans both sides of a document bound by the short edge.
Darken / Lighten
Purpose:
To adjust the density to make the scanned image darker or lighter than the original.
Values:
Darken 3
Darken 2
Darken 1
Normal *
Lighten 1
Lighten 2
Lighten 3
Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Works well with dark documents.
Contrast
Purpose:
To adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original.
Values:
High
Medium *
Low
Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker than the original.
Does not adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original.
Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors lighter than the original.
Understanding the Printer Menus 237
Sharpness
Purpose:
To adjust the sharpness to make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.
Values:
Sharpen
Normal *
Soften
Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.
Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.
Makes the scanned image softer than the original.
Auto Exposure
Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Values:
Off
On *
Original Size
Purpose:
To specify the default paper size.
Values: mm series
Does not suppress the background.
Suppresses the background to enhance text.
A4 (210x297mm) *1
A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
Statement (5.5x8.5")
Executive (7.3x10.5")
*1
Denotes country-specific factory default values.
inch series
Letter (8.5x11") *1
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
Statement (5.5x8.5")
A4 (210x297mm)
A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Executive (7.3x10.5")
238 Understanding the Printer Menus
*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.
Margin
Purpose:
To specify the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the scanned image.
Values:
Top/Bottom
Left/Right
Middle
0.1 inch * (2 mm * )
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
0.1 inch * (2 mm * )
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
0.0 inches * (0 mm * )
Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).
Create Folder
NOTE: Create Folder feature is available only for Scan to USB or Scan to Network Folder.
Purpose:
To specify whether to create a folder when saving scanned images.
Values:
Off
On *
Does not create a folder when saving a scanned image.
Creates a folder when saving a scanned image.
File Naming Mode
Purpose:
To specify the detailed setting of File Naming Mode .
Values:
Auto *
Add Prefix
Add Suffix
Prefix/Suffix String
Prefix/Suffix String
Sets the default file name.
Adds texts in front of the file name.
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.
Adds texts after the file name.
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.
Save Settings
The Save Settings screen appears when is tapped on the Scan Settings screen of the Scan to Email, Scan to
Network Folder, or Scan to USB feature, and on the Scan to PC screen.
Use Save Settings to save a variety of scan features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for Scan.
Tile Settings
The Tile Settings screen appears when is tapped on the Scan to WSD screen.
Use Tile Settings to edit the Scan to WSD tile.
Understanding the Printer Menus 239
Fax
Use the Fax menus to configure a variety of fax features.
NOTE: The Fax function cannot be used unless you set up a country code under Country . If Country is not set up, a message Set the Country Code appears on the display.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:
Enter Number
Speed Dial
Phone Book
On Hook
Individuals
Groups
Network Phone Book
Send *
Receive
Polling
Enters the fax number using the keyboard.
Enters the speed dial number stored in the printer.
Selects a fax number from the local address book.
Selects a group dial number from the local address book.
Searches a fax number from the server address book.
Sends faxes manually.
Receives faxes manually.
Manually retrieves information from a remote machine.
Fax Settings
The Fax Settings screen appears when is tapped on the Fax screen.
Use Fax Settings to configure a variety of fax features.
Darken / Lighten
Purpose:
To adjust the density to make the copy darker or lighter than the original.
Values:
Darken 3
Darken 2
Darken 1
Normal *
Lighten 1
Lighten 2
Lighten 3
Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Works well with dark documents.
2 Sided Scanning
Purpose:
To specify whether to scan both sides of a document.
Values:
1 Sided *
2 Sided Long Edge Binding *
Short Edge Binding
Scans one side of a document.
Scans both sides of a document bound by the long edge.
Scans both sides of a document bound by the short edge.
240 Understanding the Printer Menus
Polling Receive
Purpose:
To receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.
Values:
Off *
On
Does not receive faxes using Polling Receive.
Receives faxes using Polling Receive.
Resolution
Purpose:
To specify the scan resolution to improve the output quality.
Values:
Standard *
Fine
Super Fine
Photo
Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The enabled only if the remote machine also supports the below.
Super Fine mode is
Super Fine mode. See the notes
Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.
Fax Cover Page
Purpose:
To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Values:
Off *
On
Delayed Send
Purpose:
To send a fax at a later time.
Values:
Does not attach a cover page to faxes.
Attaches a cover page to faxes.
Off *
On
Does not send a fax at a later time.
Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.
NOTE: A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored.
Save Settings
The Save Settings screen appears when icon is tapped on the Fax Settings screen.
Use Save Settings to save a variety of fax features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for Fax.
NOTE: Up to 30 addresses can be stored on the printer. If you have the addresses of more than 31, you cannot save settings of fax features. In that case, please reduce to 30.
Understanding the Printer Menus 241
Print PDF/TIFF
NOTE: Print PDF/TIFF function is available only when a USB memory is inserted in the front USB port.
Purpose:
To specify the document stored in the root, file, or folder in a USB memory. See "Print Settings" for more details about the various print settings you can set for the print.
Print JPEG
NOTE: Print JPEG function is available only when a USB memory is inserted in the front USB port.
Purpose:
To specify the photos stored in the root, file, or folder in a USB memory. See "Print Settings" for more details about the various print settings you can set for the print.
Print Settings
The Print Settings screen appears when is tapped on the Print PDF/TIFF or Print JPEG screen.
Use Print Settings to configure a variety of print features.
Quantity
Purpose:
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.
Select Tray
Purpose:
To specify the input tray.
Values:
MPF
Size mm series
The paper is fed from the MPF. When Use Driver
Settings for Print Job is set in MPF of Tray
Settings , Any is displayed for Size and Type . If you start the print job with Any as the paper size and type, A4 or
Letter is selected as the paper size and plain is selected as the paper type. If you want to specify the size and type of paper in the MPF, select type.
MPF and specify the paper size and
A4
(210x297mm) *1
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Letter
(8.5x11")
Folio
(8.5x13")
242 Understanding the Printer Menus
Type
Tray1 *
Tray2
*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.
inch series
Legal
(8.5x14")
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
Letter
(8.5x11") *1
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Statement
(5.5x8.5")
A4
(210x297mm)
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Plain
Plain Thick
Covers
(106-163g/m 2 )
Covers Thick
(164-216g/m 2 )
Rough Surface
Labels
Envelope
Recycled
Japanese Postcard
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color
The paper is fed from tray1.
The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Understanding the Printer Menus 243
2 Sided Printing
Purpose:
To print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Values:
1 Sided *
2 Sided Long Edge Binding *
Short Edge Binding
Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by the long edge.
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by the short edge.
Layout
Purpose:
To specify the output layout.
Values:
1-Up *
2-Up
4-Up
Off(No Scaling)
Image Types
Purpose:
To set the print image quality.
Values:
Prints one page on one side of a sheet of paper.
Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
Prints without scaling.
Auto *
Photos (Standard Quality)
Photos (High Quality)
Text
Collation
Purpose:
To specify whether to sort the job.
Values:
Prints PDF/TIFF files in the Text mode and JPEG files in the Photos (Standard Quality) mode.
Prints the photographic images at the standard quality.
Prints the photographic images at the high quality.
Prints the text document at the standard quality.
Collated
Uncollated *
Sorts a job.
Does not sort a job.
244 Understanding the Printer Menus
PDF Password
Purpose:
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the
PDF file).
Values:
Enter PDF Password Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF job.
Save Settings
The Save Settings screen appears when is tapped on the Print Settings screen.
Use Save Settings to save a variety of print features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for USB Direct
Print.
Dell Document Hub
NOTE: The Dell Document Hub feature is available on the Dell Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw only.
Use the Dell Document Hub menus to configure a variety of Dell Document Hub features.
Search for Files
Purpose:
To search the files saved in the cloud services, and print them from the printer.
Values:
Text Box Enters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Sets the settings of the Print Settings.
Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.
Browse for Files
Purpose:
To browse and print the files saved in the selected cloud services.
Values:
Text Box Enters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.
Searches for the files in the current location or the selected cloud services.
Sets the settings of the Print Settings.
Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Saves the settings of the Print Settings as Favorite.
Understanding the Printer Menus 245
Scan
Purpose:
To scan the document and save the scanned file in the cloud service.
Values:
File Name
File Format
Tag
Enters the file name you want to use.
Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.
Enters the tag you want to use.
Searches for the location to save the scanned file. You can search for the location across the cloud services.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
PDF Password
Purpose:
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the
PDF file).
Values:
Enter PDF Password Enters the document open password to print the secure PDF job.
File Name Option
Purpose:
To specify the way to name the scanned document.
Values:
Off
Add Prefix
Add Suffix
Prefix/Suffix String
Prefix/Suffix String
For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings."
Smart OCR Scan
Purpose:
To scan the document using OCR and save it in the cloud service.
Values:
Adds no text in front of the file name or after the file name.
Adds texts in front of the file name.
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.
Adds texts after the file name.
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.
File Name
File Format
Enters the file name you want to use.
Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.
246 Understanding the Printer Menus
Tag Enters the tag you want to use.
Searches for the location to save the scanned file. You can search for the location across the cloud services.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
File Format
Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.
Values:
PDF(Searchable)
RTF
DOC
DOCX
XLS
XLSX
PPTX
OCR Language
Purpose:
To specify the language for the OCR.
Values:
Auto
English
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska
PDF Password
Purpose:
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the
PDF file).
Values:
Enter PDF Password Enters the document open password to print the secure PDF job.
Understanding the Printer Menus 247
Remove Blank Page
Purpose:
To specify whether to remove the blank pages.
Values:
Off *
On
Disables the Remove Blank Page feature.
Enables the Remove Blank Page feature.
File Name Option
Purpose:
To specify the way to name the scanned document.
Values:
Off
Add Prefix
Add Suffix
Prefix/Suffix String
Prefix/Suffix String
For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings."
E-mail Me
Purpose:
To scan the document and send to you as an attached file of an e-mail.
Values:
Adds no text in front of the file name or after the file name.
Adds texts in front of the file name.
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.
Adds texts after the file name.
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.
File Format
Subject
Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.
Enters the subject you want to use.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
File Format
Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.
Values:
PDF(Searchable)
RTF
DOC
DOCX
248 Understanding the Printer Menus
XLS
XLSX
PPTX
Multi-Page TIFF
TIFF
JPEG
OCR Language
Purpose:
To specify the language for the OCR.
Values:
Auto
English
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska
PDF Password
Purpose:
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the
PDF file).
Values:
Enter PDF Password Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF job.
Remove Blank Page
Purpose:
To specify whether to remove the blank pages.
Values:
Off
On
Disables the Remove Blank Page feature.
Enables the Remove Blank Page feature.
For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings."
Understanding the Printer Menus 249
Business Card Reader
Purpose:
To scan the business card and send to you as an attached file (vCard format) of an e-mail.
Values:
Subject Enters the subject you want to use.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Add Apps
Use the Add Apps menu to add a variety of tiles on the Home screen.
Panel Lock
This feature prevents unauthorized personnel from changing the settings made by the administrator. For regular printing, items can be selected from the menu and printer settings remain unchanged. For regular printing, items can be configured using the printer driver.
NOTE: Disabling the operator panel menus does not prevent access to the Stored Print and Tray Settings menus.
Enabling the Panel Lock
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings .
3 Tap Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings .
4 Tap Panel Lock .
5 Tap Panel Lock Control .
6 Tap Enable , and then tap OK .
7 Enter the new password, and then tap OK .
CAUTION: Be sure to remember the password. The procedure described below allows you to reset the password, but the settings for Address Book and Phone Book are cleared.
• Turn off the printer. Then, while holding the and 8.
(Information) button, turn on the printer. Perform steps 7
8 Re-enter the password to confirm the password that you entered, and then tap OK .
The password has been changed.
To change the password while Panel Lock is Enable , perform steps 1 to 4 above, and then tap Change
Password . Perform steps 7 and 8 above to change the password.
Disabling the Panel Lock
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings .
3 Tap Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings .
4 Tap Panel Lock .
5 Tap Panel Lock Control .
6 Tap Disable .
250 Understanding the Printer Menus
7 Enter the current password, and then tap OK .
The setting has been changed.
Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the phone book, address book, or menu parameters are reset to their default values.
The following menu parameters are exceptions and are not reset.
• Network settings
• Panel Lock settings and password
• Functions Control settings (Copy, Scan to E-mail, Fax, Scan to Network Folder, Scan to PC, PC Scan, Scan to
USB, USB Direct Print) and passwords
• Secure Receive settings and password
• Login Error settings
• Set Available Time settings
• Secure Job Expiration settings
• USB Port settings
• AccessControl Mode settings
• AccessControl Error Report settings
• Non Registered User settings
• NFC Authentication settings
• Tap to Print settings
When Using the Operator Panel
1 Press the (Information) button.
2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings .
3 Tap Maintenance .
4 Tap Reset Defaults appears, and then tap Reset Defaults .
5 Tap the desired setting, and then tap Initialize .
User Fax Section
User Scan Section
User Account Section
System Section
Resets the phone book data.
Resets the address book data.
Resets the user registration information.
Resets the system parameters.
6 Tap Yes , Reset .
The printer is restarted automatically.
Understanding the Printer Menus 251
252 Understanding the Printer Menus
16
Print Media Guidelines
Print media refers to paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others. Your printer provides high-quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing troubles. This section describes selecting and caring for print media.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in your printer.
Paper
For the best print quality, use 90 g/m 2 (24 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media.
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper accordingly. See
"Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder" and "Loading Print Media in the MPF" for detailed loading instructions.
Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m 2 (20 lb) xerographic paper. Business paper designed for general business use also provides acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand high temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. The laser printing process heats paper to high temperatures. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media. When choosing any print media, you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.
Unacceptable Paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless paper, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper.
• Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer.
• Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit.
• Preprinted paper that requires a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±0.09 inches, such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms.
In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.
• Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, and thermal paper.
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper.
• Recycled paper containing more than 25 % post-consumer waste that does not meet DIN 19 309.
• Multiple-part forms or documents.
• Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text) when printing on talc or acid paper.
Print Media Guidelines 253
Selecting Paper
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed.
• Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam.
• Do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.
• Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
• Flex the paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.
Selecting Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads
When selecting pre-printed and letterhead paper for the printer:
• Use grain long paper for best results.
• Use only forms and letterheads printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Select paper that absorb ink, but does not bleed.
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
• Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copying machines. The ink must withstand temperatures of 225 °C (437 °F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Use inks that are not affected by the resin in the toner or the silicone in the fusing unit. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper
When selecting pre-punched paper for the printer:
• Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre-punched paper.
• Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam.
• Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper.
• Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched paper.
254 Print Media Guidelines
Envelopes
Depending on the envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of wrinkling. It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media. See "Loading Envelopes in the MPF" for instructions on loading envelopes.
When printing on envelopes:
• Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.
• Set the print media source to the MPF. Set the paper type to Envelope , and select the correct size of envelope from the printer driver.
• Use envelopes made from 75 g/m
90 g/m 2 (24 lb bond) weight.
2 (20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105 g/m 2 (28 lb bond) weight for the envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25 % or less. Envelopes with 100 % cotton content must not exceed
• Use only freshly unpackaged, undamaged envelopes.
• Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401 °F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with the envelope supplier.
• Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
• To load an envelope into the MPF, insert the envelope with the flaps closed or open and the short-edge of the envelope facing into the printer. The print side must be facing up.
• See "Loading Envelopes in the MPF" for instructions on loading envelopes.
• Use one envelope size during a print job.
• Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60 %) and the high printing temperatures may seal the envelopes.
• For best performance, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
– Have nicked edges or bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
Print Media Guidelines 255
Labels
Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers.
When selecting labels:
• Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401
°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi).
• Use labels that can be without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.
CAUTION: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.
When printing on labels:
• Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401 °F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Set the paper type to Label in the printer driver.
• Load labels in the MPF. Tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder do not support labels.
• Do not load labels together with paper in the MPF.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die-cut.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.
• Do not print a label through the printer more than once.
• Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
• Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam.
• Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is recommended that zone coating of the adhesive is done at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your printer and could void your warranty.
WARNING: Otherwise a jam occurs in the printer and contaminate your printer and your cartridge with adhesive. As a result, could void your printer and cartridge warranties.
Storing Print Media
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines will help to avoid media feeding problems and uneven print quality.
• Store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21 °C (70 °F) and the relative humidity is 40 %.
• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
256 Print Media Guidelines
Identifying Print Media and Specifications
The following tables show print media information.
Supported Paper Sizes
Paper size MPF Tray1 Optional 550-sheet feeder
Y
Duplex unit
A4 (210 x 297 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11 in)
Folio (8.5 x 13 in)
Legal (8.5 x 14 in)
Statement (5.5 x 8.5 in)
Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in)
Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 in)
Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 in)
DL (110 x 220mm)
C5 (162 x 229mm)
Postcard JPN
Custom *1, 2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
*1 Custom: width: 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) for the MPF and tray1; 139.7 mm (5.5 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) for the optional 550-sheet feeder length: 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches) for the MPF and tray1; 210 mm (8.27 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches) for the optional 550-sheet feeder
*2 XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver does not support custom size paper.
Print Media Guidelines 257
Supported Paper Types
Paper type
Plain
Plain Thick
Covers
Covers Thick
Rough surface
Labels
Envelope
Recycled
Japanese Postcard
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Side 1
Y
Y
Y
MPF
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Side 2
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Side 1
Y
Y
Y
Tray1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Side 2
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Optional 550-sheet feeder
Side 1
Y
Side 2
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Duplex unit
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Side 1
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Side 2
N
N
N
NOTE: For Plain paper, you can set the paper density by selecting the Paper Density (Light or Normal) under Maintenance from the operator panel, Tool Box, or Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. Once you set the Paper Density settings, the printer uses the settings for Plain paper.
NOTE: Rough Surface paper can only be fed one by one.
Paper Type Specifications
Weight (g/m
2
) Paper type
Plain
Plain Thick
Covers
Covers Thick
Rough surface
Labels
Envelope
Recycled
Japanese Postcard
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color
60–90
80/90–105
106–163
164–216
106–163
106–163
91–105
60–105
190
60–90
60–90
60–90
60–90
Remarks
-
-
-
-
-
-
Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.
Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.
-
-
-
-
Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.
258 Print Media Guidelines
17
Loading Print Media
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
Before loading any print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information is usually indicated on the print media package.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ Cloud Multifunction Printer | H815dw unless otherwise mentioned.
Capacity
Tray1 can hold:
• 250 sheets of the standard paper.
The optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2) can hold:
• 550 sheets of the standard paper.
The multipurpose feeder (MPF) can hold:
• 50 sheets of the standard paper.
Print Media Dimensions
The maximum dimensions of print media that the MPF and tray1 can handle are:
• Width — 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
• Length — 127 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)
The maximum dimensions of print media that the optional 550-sheet feeder can handle are:
• Width — 139.7 mm (5.5 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
• Length — 210 mm (8.27 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)
Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
This section describes how to load letterhead. For details about loading print media other than letterhead, see
"Loading Paper."
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in the printer.
Loading Letterhead (Pre-Printed and Pre-Punched Paper)
The pre-printed paper such as letterhead and pre-punched paper must be inserted top edge first with the print side facing up as shown below.
NOTE: Set Letterhead 2-Sided or Letterhead Duplex Mode to Enable and Paper Type to
Letterhead , Preprinted , or Prepunched from the operator panel or the printer driver even when you print on a single side of letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper.
Loading Print Media 259
Print media source
Tray1 and optional 550-sheet feeder
MPF
Print side
Face up
Face up
Page orientation
Letterhead enters the printer first
Letterhead enters the printer first
Loading Print Media in the MPF
1 Gently pull open the MPF cover.
260 Loading Print Media
2 Slide the width guides to the edge of the tray. The width guides should be fully extended.
3 Insert all media face up and top edge first into the MPF.
NOTE: Do not force the print media into the MPF.
4 Slide both width guides until they rest lightly against the edge of the print media stack.
NOTE: Do not force the print media into the MPF.
5 On the touch panel, tap Size .
6 Tap until the desired paper size appears, and then select the size.
7 Tap Type .
8 Tap until the desired paper type appears, and then select the type.
9 Tap OK .
Loading Print Media 261
Loading Small Print Media in the MPF
When loading small print media such as monarch envelope or the user-specified print media whose feed direction length is 191.6 mm or less in the MPF, remove the MPF from the printer.
1 Gently pull open the MPF cover.
2 Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull the MPF from the printer.
3 Slide the width guides to the edge of the tray. The width guides should be fully extended.
262 Loading Print Media
4 Pull up the length guide and slide it toward MPF cover until it stops.
5 Load the print media into the MPF with the recommended print side facing up so that the top edge of the print media enters the printer first.
6 Align the paper guides against the edges of the print media.
Loading Print Media 263
7 Insert the MPF into the printer.
8 On the touch panel, tap Size .
9 Tap until the desired paper size appears, and then select the size.
10 Tap Type .
11 Tap until the desired paper type appears, and then select the type.
12 Tap OK .
Printing on Envelopes – Envelope Mode
To print on envelopes with better print quality, set the printer to the envelope mode.
NOTE: Print jobs can be done on envelopes even when the printer is not set to the envelope mode. To get the better print results, set the printer to the envelope mode.
NOTE: When the printer is in the envelope mode, print jobs cannot be done while the paper type is set to other than envelopes.
To Set the Printer to the Envelope Mode
1 Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.
264 Loading Print Media
2 Lift the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.
3 Slide the envelope switches on both sides of the fusing unit to the position.
WARNING: The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch it, doing so may cause burns.
4 Press down the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.
Loading Print Media 265
5 Close the rear cover.
To Cancel the Envelope Mode
1 Pull the rear cover handle to open the rear cover.
2 Lift the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.
266 Loading Print Media
3 Slide the envelope switches on the both sides of the fusing unit to the position.
WARNING: The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch it, doing so may cause burns.
4 Press down the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.
5 Close the rear cover.
Loading Print Media 267
Loading Envelopes in the MPF
Use the following guidelines when loading envelopes in the MPF:
CAUTION: Never use envelopes with windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the printer.
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid jams, press firmly across the whole envelopes to flatten them as shown below before loading the envelopes in the MPF.
NOTE: The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes that can be loaded in the MPF is approximately 15 mm (0.59 inches) (15 envelopes).
Envelope #10, DL
Load the envelopes in the short edge feed orientation with the flaps closed and the print side up. Ensure that the flaps come at the right when you face towards the printer.
Monarch
You need to pull up and slide the length guide. Load the envelopes in the short edge feed orientation with the flaps closed and the print side up. Ensure that the flaps come at the right when you face towards the printer.
268 Loading Print Media
C5
Load the envelopes in the short edge feed orientation with the flaps open or closed and the print side up. Ensure that the flaps come at the bottom with the flaps open or at the top with the flaps closed when you face towards the printer.
When you print with the orientation of the 1, position of the envelopes may be distorted on the output tray. In this case, set the orientation of the 2.
1 2
Loading Letterhead in the MPF
When you use the MPF, letterhead and hole punched paper must be inserted top edge first with the print side facing up.
Using the MPF
• Load only one size and type of print media during a single print job.
• To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality print media that is designed for use in laser printer.
For more guidelines on print media, see "Print Media Guidelines."
• Do not add or remove print media when there is still print media in the MPF or when the printer is printing from the MPF. This may result in a paper jam.
• Print media should be loaded with the recommended print side up and the top of the print media going into the
MPF first.
• Do not place objects on the MPF. Also, avoid pressing down or applying excessive force on it.
• The icons on the MPF show how to load the MPF with paper, and how to turn an envelope for printing.
Loading Print Media 269
Linking Trays
The printer automatically links the trays when you load the same size and type of print media in them. The first tray will be utilized until the media runs out, and then the next tray will be used.
NOTE: The print media should be the same size and type in each tray.
The MPF cannot be linked to any of the tray sources.
After loading the selected trays with the same size and type of print media, select the Paper Type setting in the Tray
Settings component for each source (tray).
To disable tray linking change the paper type in one of the sources (trays) to a unique value.
NOTE: If different types of print media of the same size are loaded in each tray, the printer will automatically link them if the paper type is not specified in the printer driver properties/preferences.
270 Loading Print Media
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Printing
Copying
Scanning
Faxing
Cloud connectivity
Mobile printing
Duplex printing
Frequently asked questions
You can connect to a network using an Ethernet cable or wirelessly. The guide provides detailed steps on how to connect and configure settings.
The guide lists supported paper types and sizes. You can find information on loading different media types, including envelopes, labels, and letterheads.
You can scan documents from the operator panel or using a computer. The guide provides instructions on how to scan to a PC, USB, network folder, and email.
The guide details how to send and receive faxes, set up speed dial, and utilize the phone book.